Sony RX10 II User Manual
Displayed below is the user manual for RX10 II by Sony which is a product in the Digital Cameras category. This manual has pages.
Related Manuals
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Digital Still Camera DSC-RX10M2
How to Use
Before Use
Names of parts
Checking the camera and the supplied items [1]
Identifying parts [2]
Icons and indicators
List of icons on the screen [3]
Display panel [4]
Using the strap
Using the shoulder strap [5]
Attaching the eyepiece cup
Attaching the eyepiece cup [6]
Adjusting the viewfinder
Adjusting the viewfinder (diopter-adjustment) [7]
In-Camera guide
About the [In-Camera Guide] [8]
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Preparing the camera
Charging the battery pack
Inserting the battery pack into the camera [9]
Charging the battery pack while it is inserted in the camera [10]
Charging by connecting to a computer [11]
Battery life and the number of images that can be recorded/played back using a battery
pack [12]
Supplying power from a wall outlet (wall socket) [13]
Removing the battery pack [14]
Inserting a memory card (sold separately)
Inserting a memory card [15]
Removing the memory card [16]
Usable memory cards [17]
Attaching a lens
Attaching the lens hood [18]
Setting the language, date and time
Setting language, date and time [19]
Confirming the operation method
Confirming the operation method
Using the control wheel [20]
Using the manual ring [21]
Using the control dial [22]
Using MENU items [23]
Using the Fn (Function) button [24]
Using the "Quick Navi" [25]
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Shooting
Shooting still images/movies
Shooting still images [26]
Shooting movies [27]
Selecting a shooting mode
List of mode dial functions [28]
Intelligent Auto [29]
Superior Auto [30]
About Scene Recognition [31]
The advantages of automatic shooting [32]
Program Auto [33]
Sweep Panorama [34]
Scene Selection [35]
Shutter Priority [36]
Aperture Priority [37]
Manual Exposure [38]
BULB [39]
Memory recall [40]
Movie [41]
Shooting super-slow-motion movies (HFR Settings) [42]
Using shooting functions
Using the zoom
Zoom [43]
The zoom features available with this product [44]
Zoom Setting [45]
About zoom scale [46]
Zoom Speed [47]
Smart Telecon. [48]
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Zoom Func. on Ring [49]
Using the flash
Using flash [50]
Notes on using the flash [51]
Flash Mode [52]
Flash Comp. [53]
Selecting a screen display mode
Switching the screen display (Shooting) [54]
DISP Button (Finder) [55]
DISP Button (Monitor) [56]
TC/UB Disp. Switch [57]
Selecting still image size/image quality
Image Size (still image) [58]
Aspect Ratio (still image) [59]
Quality (still image) [60]
Panorama: Size [61]
Panorama: Direction [62]
Adjusting the focus
Changing the focus method using the focus mode dial [63]
Focus Area [64]
Center Lock-on AF [65]
Focus-lock [66]
Manual Focus [67]
Direct manual focus (DMF) [68]
MF Assist (still image) [69]
Focus Magnifier [70]
Focus Magnif. Time [71]
Peaking Level [72]
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Peaking Color [73]
Pre-AF (still image) [74]
AF/MF control [75]
AF Illuminator (still image) [76]
Eye AF [77]
Measuring the exact distance to the subject [78]
Adjusting the exposure
Exposure Comp. [79]
Exposure compensation dial [80]
Metering Mode [81]
AE lock [82]
AEL w/ shutter (still image) [83]
Exp.comp.set [84]
Zebra [85]
Exposure Set. Guide [86]
Reset EV Comp. [87]
Selecting a drive mode (Continuous shooting/Self-timer)
Drive Mode [88]
Cont. Shooting [89]
Spd Priority Cont. [90]
Self-timer [91]
Self-timer(Cont) [92]
Cont. Bracket [93]
Single Bracket [94]
WB bracket [95]
DRO Bracket [96]
Settings for bracket shooting [97]
Indicator during bracket shooting [98]
Selecting the ISO sensitivity
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
ISO [99]
ISO AUTO Min. SS [100]
Multi Frame NR [101]
Correcting the brightness or contrast
D-Range Opt. (DRO) [102]
Auto HDR [103]
Adjusting color tones
White Balance [104]
Capturing a basic white color in [Custom Setup] mode [105]
Selecting an effect mode
Picture Effect [106]
Creative Style [107]
Recording movies
Movie recording formats [108]
File Format (movie) [109]
Record Setting (movie) [110]
Dual Video REC [111]
Capturing still images while recording movies (Dual Rec) [112]
Auto Dual Rec [113]
Img. Size(Dual Rec) [114]
Quality(Dual Rec) [115]
Marker Display (movie) [116]
Marker Settings (movie) [117]
SteadyShot (movie) [118]
Audio Recording [119]
Audio Level Display [120]
Audio Rec Level [121]
Audio Out Timing [122]
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Wind Noise Reduct. [123]
Auto Slow Shut. (movie) [124]
MOVIE Button [125]
Picture Profile [126]
High Frame Rate [127]
Customizing the shooting functions for convenient use
Memory [128]
Function Menu Set. [129]
Custom Key Settings [130]
Function of the control wheel [131]
Function of the AEL button [132]
Function of the Custom button [133]
Function of the Center button [134]
Function of the Left button [135]
Function of the Right button [136]
Function of the down button [137]
Setting the other functions of this product
Smile/Face Detect. [138]
Soft Skin Effect (still image) [139]
Face Registration (New Registration) [140]
Face Registration (Order Exchanging) [141]
Face Registration (Delete) [142]
Red Eye Reduction [143]
Auto Obj. Framing (still image) [144]
SteadyShot (still image) [145]
Long Exposure NR (still image) [146]
High ISO NR (still image) [147]
Write Date (still image) [148]
Color Space (still image) [149]
Grid Line [150]
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Auto Review [151]
Live View Display [152]
Bright Monitoring [153]
FINDER/MONITOR [154]
Release w/o Card [155]
Shutter Type (still image) [156]
Dial / Wheel Lock [157]
Deactivate Monitor [158]
ND Filter [159]
Viewing
Viewing still images
Playing back images [160]
Playback zoom [161]
Image Index [162]
Switching the screen display (during playback) [163]
Deleting images
Deleting a displayed image [164]
Deleting multiple selected images [165]
Playing back movies
Playing back movies [166]
Motion Shot Video [167]
Viewing panoramic images
Playing back panoramic images [168]
Printing
Specify Printing [169]
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Using viewing functions
View Mode [170]
Display Rotation [171]
Slide Show [172]
Rotate [173]
Protect [174]
Viewing images on a TV
Viewing images on an HD TV [175]
Viewing images on a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV [176]
Changing settings
Setup menu
Monitor Brightness [177]
Viewfinder Bright. [178]
Finder Color Temp. [179]
Volume Settings [180]
Audio signals [181]
Upload Settings(Eye-Fi) [182]
Tile Menu [183]
Mode Dial Guide [184]
Delete confirm. [185]
Display Quality [186]
Pwr Save Start Time [187]
NTSC/PAL Selector [188]
Demo Mode [189]
TC/UB Settings [190]
HDMI Resolution [191]
24p/60p Output (movie) (Only for 1080 60i compatible models) [192]
CTRL FOR HDMI [193]
HDMI Info. Display [194]
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
TC Output (movie) [195]
REC Control (movie) [196]
4K Output Sel. (movie) [197]
USB Connection [198]
USB LUN Setting [199]
USB Power Supply [200]
Language [201]
Date/Time Setup [202]
Area Setting [203]
Copyright Info [204]
Format [205]
File Number [206]
Select REC Folder [207]
New Folder [208]
Folder Name [209]
Recover Image DB [210]
Display Media Info. [211]
Version [212]
Certification Logo (For some models only) [213]
Setting Reset [214]
Using Wi -Fi functions
Connecting this product and a Smartphone
PlayMemories Mobile [215]
Connecting an Android smartphone to this product [216]
Connecting the product to an iPhone or iPad [217]
Calling up an application using [One-touch(NFC)] [218]
Controlling this product using a Smartphone
Smart Remote Embedded [219]
One-touch connection with an NFC-enabled Android smartphone (NFC One-touch
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
remote) [220]
Transferring images to a Smartphone
Send to Smartphone [221]
Sending images to an Android smartphone (NFC One-touch Sharing) [222]
Transferring images to a computer
Send to Computer [223]
Transferring images to a TV
View on TV [224]
Changing the settings of Wi-Fi functions
Airplane Mode [225]
WPS Push [226]
Access Point Set. [227]
Edit Device Name [228]
Disp MAC Address [229]
SSID/PW Reset [230]
Reset Network Set. [231]
Adding applications to the product
PlayMemories Camera Apps
PlayMemories Camera Apps [232]
Recommended computer environment [233]
Installing the applications
Opening a service account [234]
Downloading applications [235]
Downloading applications directly to the product using the Wi-Fi function [236]
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Starting the applications
Launching the downloaded application [237]
Managing the applications
Uninstalling applications [238]
Changing the order of applications [239]
Confirming the account information of PlayMemories Camera Apps [240]
Using a computer
Recommended computer environment
Recommended computer environment [241]
Using the software
PlayMemories Home [242]
Installing PlayMemories Home [243]
Software for Mac computers [244]
Image Data Converter [245]
Installing Image Data Converter [246]
Accessing Image Data Converter Guide [247]
Remote Camera Control [248]
Installing Remote Camera Control [249]
Accessing the Help of Remote Camera Control [250]
Connecting this product and a computer
Connecting the product to a computer [251]
Importing images to the computer [252]
Disconnecting the product from the computer [253]
Creating a movie disc
Selecting a disc to be created [254]
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Creating Blu-ray Discs from high-definition image quality movies [255]
Creating DVD discs (AVCHD recording discs) from high-definition image quality movies
[256]
Creating DVD discs from standard image quality movies [257]
Precautions/This product
Precautions
Precautions [258]
On the internal rechargeable battery [259]
Notes on the battery pack [260]
Charging the battery pack [261]
Notes on memory card [262]
Cleaning this product
On cleaning [263]
Number of recordable still images and recordable time of movies
Number of still images [264]
Recordable time of movies [265]
Using this product abroad
Plug adaptor [266]
On TV color systems [267]
Other information
ZEISS lens [268]
AVCHD format [269]
License [270]
Trademarks
Trademarks [271]
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Troubleshooting
If you have problems
If you have problems
Troubleshooting [272]
Troubleshooting
Battery pack and power
You cannot insert the battery pack into the product. [273]
You cannot turn on the product. [274]
The power turns off suddenly. [275]
The remaining battery level indicator shows an incorrect level. [276]
The charge lamp on the product flashes when charging the battery pack. [277]
The battery pack is not charged. [278]
The monitor does not turn on even when the product is turned on. [279]
Shooting still images/movies
You cannot record images. [280]
There is a clacking sound when the brightness of the subject changes. [281]
Recording takes a long time. [282]
The same image is captured multiple times. [283]
The shutter is released continuously. [284]
The image is out of focus. [285]
Zoom does not work. [286]
The flash does not work. [287]
Fuzzy white circular spots appear on images shot using the flash. [288]
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
The close-up shoot function (Macro) does not work. [289]
The recording date and time are not displayed on the screen. [290]
The date and time are recorded incorrectly. [291]
The aperture value and/or shutter speed flashes. [292]
The image colors are not correct. [293]
Noise appears in the image when you view the screen in a dark place. [294]
Dark shadow appears on the image. [295]
The eyes of the subject come out red. [296]
Dots appear and remain on the screen. [297]
You cannot shoot images continuously. [298]
The image is not clear in the viewfinder. [299]
No images appear on the viewfinder. [300]
No images appear on the monitor. [301]
[Finder/Monitor Sel.] does not work even though it has been assigned to a certain key
using [Custom Key Settings]. [302]
The image is whitish (Flare)./Blurring of light appears on the image (Ghosting). [303]
The image is blurred. [304]
The monitor darkens after a short period of time passed. [305]
The flash takes too long to recharge. [306]
The control dial or control wheel does not work. [307]
Sound is not recorded properly. [308]
Viewing images
Images cannot be played back. [309]
The date and time are not displayed. [310]
The image cannot be deleted. [311]
The image was deleted by mistake. [312]
A DPOF mark cannot be put. [313]
Wi-Fi
You cannot find the wireless access point to be connected. [314]
[WPS Push] does not work. [315]
[Send to Computer] is canceled halfway. [316]
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
You cannot send movies to a smartphone. [317]
[Smart Remote Embedded] or [Send to Smartphone] is canceled halfway. [318]
The shooting screen for [Smart Remote Embedded] is not displayed smoothly./The
connection between this product and the smartphone is disconnected. [319]
You cannot use One-Touch connection (NFC). [320]
Computers
The computer does not recognize this product. [321]
You cannot import images. [322]
The image and sound are interrupted by noise when viewing a movie on a computer.
[323]
Images exported from a computer cannot be viewed on this product. [324]
Memory cards
Formatted the memory card by mistake. [325]
Printing
You cannot print images. [326]
The color of the image is strange. [327]
Images are printed with both edges cut off. [328]
You cannot print images with the date. [329]
Others
The lens gets fogged. [330]
The product stops with the lens portion extended./The product turns off with the lens
portion extended. [331]
The product becomes warm when you use it for a long time. [332]
The Clock Set screen appears when you turn on the product. [333]
The number of recordable images does not decrease, or decreases two images at a time.
[334]
Settings are reset even though resetting operation has not been performed. [335]
The product does not work properly. [336]
A sound is produced when the product is shaken. [337]
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
“--E-” appears on the screen. [338]
Messages
Messages
Self-diagnosis display [339]
Warning messages [340]
Situations this product has difficulty handling
Situations this product has difficulty handling
Situations this product has difficulty handling [341]
[1] How to Use Before Use Names of parts
Checking the camera and the supplied items
The number in parentheses indicates the number of pieces.
Camera (1)
NP-FW50 Rechargeable battery pack (1)
Micro USB Cable (1)
AC Adaptor (1)
Power cord (mains lead) (1)* (not supplied in the U.S.A. and Canada)
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
* Multiple power cords may be supplied with your camera. Use the appropriate one that
matches your country/region.
Shoulder strap (1)
Lens cap (1)
Lens hood (1)
Shoe cap (1)
(Attached on the camera)
Eyepiece cup (1)
(Attached on the camera)
Instruction Manual (1)
Wi-Fi Connection/One-touch (NFC) Guide (1)
[2] How to Use Before Use Names of parts
Identifying parts
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
1. ON/OFF (Power) switch
2. Shutter button
3. For shooting: W/T (zoom) lever
For viewing: (Index) lever/Playback zoom lever
4. Self-timer lamp/AF Illuminator
5. Aperture index
6. Lens
7. Manual ring
8. Exposure compensation dial
9. Flash
10. Multi interface shoe*
11. Mode dial
12. Hook for shoulder strap
13. Focus mode dial
14. Aperture ring
1. (Display panel illumination) button
2. Microphone
3. Viewfinder
4. Diopter-adjustment dial
5. MOVIE (Movie) button
6. (Flash pop-up) button
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
7. Display panel
8. C1 (Custom 1) button
9. Hook for shoulder strap
10. Memory card slot
11. Memory card cover
12. Access lamp
1. MENU button
2. Speaker
3. (Microphone) jack
When an external microphone is connected, this product switches from the internal
microphone to the external microphone. If the external microphone is a plug-in-
power type, the power of the microphone is supplied by this product.
4. (Headphones) jack
5. Multi/Micro USB Terminal*
Supports Micro USB compatible device.
6. HDMI micro jack
7. Charge lamp
8. Eye sensor
9. Monitor
You can adjust the monitor to an easily viewable angle and shoot from any position.
10. Control wheel
11. Control dial
12. For shooting: AEL (AE lock) button
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
For viewing: (Playback zoom) button
13. For shooting: Fn (Function) button
For viewing: (Send to Smartphone) button
14. For shooting: C2 (Custom 2) button
For viewing: (Delete) button
15. (Playback) button
1. Aperture Click Switch
2. Wi-Fi sensor (built-in)
3. (N mark)
Touch the mark when you connect the camera to a smartphone equipped with the
NFC function.
For details on the location of the (N mark) on your Smartphone, refer to the
operating instructions of the Smartphone.
NFC (Near Field Communication) is an international standard of the short-range
wireless communication technology.
4. Battery lock lever
5. Battery insertion slot
6. Connection plate cover
Use this when using an AC-PW20 AC Adaptor (sold separately). Insert the connection
plate into the battery compartment, and then pass the cord through the connection plate
cover as shown below.
Make sure that the cord is not pinched when you close the cover.
7. Battery cover
8. Tripod socket hole
Use a tripod with a screw less than 5.5 mm (7/32 inches) long. Otherwise, you
cannot firmly secure this product, and damage to the product may occur.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
*
For details on compatible accessories for the multi interface shoe and the Multi/Micro USB
Terminal, visit the Sony web site, or consult your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service
facility. You can also use accessories that are compatible with the accessory shoe. Operations
with other manufacturers’ accessories are not guaranteed.
[3] How to Use Before Use Icons and indicators
List of icons on the screen
The displayed contents and their positions shown below are just a guideline, and may differ
from the actual display.
Monitor mode
Viewfinder mode
In Auto Mode or Scene Selection mode
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
P/A/S/M/Sweep Panorama mode
For playback
Basic information display
Histogram display
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
1. P P* A S M
Shoot Mode
Memory recall
NO CARD
Memory card/Upload
Scene Recognition icons
Scene Selection
100
Remaining number of recordable images
Aspect ratio of still images
20M / 18M / 17M / 13M / 10M / 7.5M / 6.5M / 5.0M / 4.2M / 3.7M / VGA
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Frame rate of movies
Record setting of movies
NFC is activated
100%
Remaining battery
Remaining battery warning
USB power supply
Flash charge in progress
AF Illuminator
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
SteadyShot Off/On, Camera shake warning
Airplane Mode
Overlay icon
No audio recording of movies
Wind Noise Reduct.
Setting Effect OFF
×2.0
Smart teleconverter
Database file full/Database file error
Overheating warning
Smart Zoom/ Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom
Spot metering area
C:32:00
Self-diagnosis display
Digital level gauge
Audio Level Display
View Mode
100-0003
Folder-File number
File format of movies
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Protect
DPOF
DPOF set
Auto object framing image
Dual Video REC
PC Remote
Bright Monitoring
Copyright information writing on
240fps 250fps 480fps 500fps 960fps 1000fps
Frame rate for HFR shooting
Recording timing
Writing data
CAPTURE
Capturing still image
Unable to shoot Still images
Auto Dual Rec
2.
Drive Mode
Metering Mode
Flash Mode/Red Eye Reduction
±0.0
Flash Comp.
Focus Mode
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
7500K A5 G5
White Balance (Auto, Preset, Custom, Color temperature, Color filter)
Focus Area
DRO/Auto HDR
ND Filter
+3 +3 +3
Creative Style/Contrast, Saturation, Sharpness
Smile/Face Detect.
Picture Effect
Smile detection sensitivity indicator
―
Picture Profile
3. Lock-on AF
Guide display for Lock-on AF
Bracket indicator
STBY
Movie recording standby
REC 0:12
Recording time of the movie (m:s)
Manual ring function
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Control wheel function
Control dial function
Focus
1/250
Shutter speed
F3.5
Aperture Value
±0.0
Metered Manual
±0.0
Exposure compensation
ISO400
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speed indicator
Aperture indicator
Histogram
Picture Effect error
Auto HDR image warning
2015-1-1
10:37AM
Date of recording
3/7
File number/Number of images in the view mode
Copyright information exists for image
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
REC Control
00:00:00:00
Time code (hour:minute:second:frame)
00 00 00 00
User Bit
Shooting Standby Shooting Setting
Guide display for HFR shooting
[4] How to Use Before Use Icons and indicators
Display panel
You can set the shutter speed and aperture, exposure compensation, flash compensation,
ISO, white balance, drive mode, and image quality, etc., using the display panel on top of
the camera.
Shutter speed/Aperture
Exposure compensation/Flash compensation
ISO
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
White Balance
Drive Mode
Remaining battery
Number of recordable images*
ND Filter
*Even if the number of recordable images is higher than 9,999 images, "9999" will appear on the
display panel.
To turn on the display panel backlight
Press the illumination button (A) on top of the camera. If you press the button again, the
display panel backlight will turn off.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
[5] How to Use Before Use Using the strap
Using the shoulder strap
Attach the shoulder strap to prevent damage caused by dropping the product.
1. Attach both ends of the strap.
[6] How to Use Before Use Attaching the eyepiece cup
Attaching the eyepiece cup
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
It is recommended that you attach the eyepiece cup when you intend to use the viewfinder.
1. Match the bottom side of the eyepiece cup to the viewfinder, and attach it by pushing
the top side of the eyepiece cup in.
To remove the eyepiece cup, grasp it on the left and right sides and pull it down.
[7] How to Use Before Use Adjusting the viewfinder
Adjusting the viewfinder (diopter-adjustment)
Adjust the diopter scale to your eyesight until the display appears clearly in the viewfinder. If
it is difficult to turn the diopter-adjustment dial, remove the eyepiece cup and then adjust the
dial.
1. Turn the diopter-adjustment dial.
[8] How to Use Before Use In-Camera guide
About the [In-Camera Guide]
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
The [In-Camera Guide] displays descriptions of MENU items, Fn (Function) button, and
settings, and if a function cannot be set, the reason why.
1. Press the MENU or Fn button.
2. Select the desired MENU item using up/down/left/right side on the control wheel.
3. Press the button to which the [In-Camera Guide] function is assigned.
The operation guide for the MENU item you have selected in step 2 is displayed.
If you press the on the center of the control wheel after selecting an item shown
in gray, the reason the item cannot be set is displayed.
Note
Assign the [In-Camera Guide] function to a button in advance using the [Custom Key
Settings].
[9] How to Use Preparing the camera Charging the battery pack
Inserting the battery pack into the camera
How to insert the battery pack into the camera
1. Open the battery cover.
2. Insert the battery pack while pressing the lock lever (A) with the tip of the battery until
the battery locks into place.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
3. Close the cover.
[10] How to Use Preparing the camera Charging the battery pack
Charging the battery pack while it is inserted in the
camera
When using the camera for the first time, be sure to charge the battery pack. The charged
battery pack will discharge little by little, even if you do not use it. To avoid missing a
shooting opportunity, charge the battery pack before shooting.
1. Turn the power off.
2. Connect the camera with the battery pack inserted to the AC Adaptor (supplied) using
the micro USB cable (supplied), and connect the AC Adaptor to the wall outlet (wall
socket).
For customers in the U.S.A. and Canada
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
For customers in countries/regions other than the U.S.A. and
Canada
Charge lamp
Lit: Charging
Off: Charging finished
Flashing: Charging error or charging paused temporarily because the camera is not
within the proper temperature range
If the charge lamp lights up once and then immediately turns off, the battery pack is
fully charged.
Charging time (Full charge)
The charging time is approximately 310 min. using the AC Adaptor (supplied).
The charging time may differ depending on the remaining capacity of the battery pack or
the charging conditions.
The battery pack can be charged even when it is not fully depleted.
The above charging time applies when charging a fully depleted battery pack (supplied) at
a temperature of 25°C (77°F). Charging may take longer depending on the conditions of
use and the environment.
Note
If the charge lamp flashes when the battery pack is not fully charged, remove the battery
pack or disconnect the USB cable from the camera and then re-insert it to recharge.
If the charge lamp on the camera flashes when the AC Adaptor is connected to the wall
outlet (wall socket), this indicates that charging is temporarily stopped because the
temperature is outside the recommended range. When the temperature gets back within
the appropriate range, the charging resumes. We recommend charging the battery pack
at an ambient temperature of between 10°C to 30°C (50ºF to 86ºF).
Connect the AC Adaptor to the nearest wall outlet (wall socket). If malfunctions occur
while using the AC Adaptor, immediately disconnect the plug from the wall outlet (wall
socket) to disconnect from the power source.
When you use a completely new battery pack or a battery pack that has not been used for
a long time, the charge lamp may flash quickly when the battery is charged. If this
happens, remove the battery pack or disconnect the USB cable from the camera and then
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
re-insert it to recharge.
Do not continuously or repeatedly charge the battery pack without using it if it is already
fully charged or close to fully charged. Doing so may cause a deterioration in battery
performance.
When charging is finished, disconnect the AC Adaptor from the wall outlet (wall socket).
Be sure to use only genuine Sony brand battery packs, micro USB cables (supplied) and
AC Adaptors (supplied).
[11] How to Use Preparing the camera Charging the battery pack
Charging by connecting to a computer
The battery pack can be charged by connecting the camera to a computer using a micro
USB cable.
1. Turn off the product, and connect to the USB terminal of the computer.
Note
Note the following points when charging via a computer:
If the product is connected to a laptop computer that is not connected to a power source, the
laptop battery level decreases. Do not leave the product connected to a laptop computer for an
extended period of time.
Do not turn on/off or restart the computer, or wake the computer from sleep mode when a USB
connection has been established between the computer and the camera. Doing so may cause a
malfunction. Before turning on/off or restarting the computer, or waking the computer from sleep
mode, disconnect the camera from the computer.
Proper operation cannot be guaranteed on all types of computers.
Charging cannot be guaranteed with a custom-built computer, modified computer, or a computer
connected through a USB hub.
The camera may not operate correctly when other USB devices are used at the same time.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
[12] How to Use Preparing the camera Charging the battery pack
Battery life and the number of images that can be
recorded/played back using a battery pack
Screen mode
Shooting (still images):
Number of images: approx. 400
Actual shooting (movies):
Battery life: approx. 65 min.
Continuous shooting (movies):
Battery life: approx. 130 min.
Viewing (still images):
Battery life: approx. 315 min., Number of images: approx. 6300
Viewfinder mode
Shooting (still images):
Number of images: approx. 360
Actual shooting (movies):
Battery life: approx. 65 min.
Continuous shooting (movies):
Battery life: approx. 135 min.
Note
The above battery life and number of images applies when the battery pack has been fully
charged. The battery life and number of images may decrease depending on the
conditions of use.
The battery life and number of images that can be recorded is for shooting under the
following conditions:
The battery pack is used at an ambient temperature of 25°C (77°F).
Using Sony Memory Stick PRO Duo (Mark2) media (sold separately)
[Display Quality]: [Standard]
The number for “Shooting (still images)” is based on the CIPA standard, and is for
shooting under the following conditions (CIPA: Camera & Imaging Products Association):
DISP: [Display All Info.]
One picture is taken every 30 seconds.
The zoom is switched alternately between the W and T ends.
The flash strobes once for every two pictures.
The power is turned on and off once every ten times.
The number of minutes for movie shooting is based on the CIPA standard, and is for
shooting under the following conditions:
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
The image quality is set to 60i 17M (FH) .
Actual shooting (movies): Battery life based on repeated shooting, zooming, shooting stand- by,
turning on/off, etc.
Continuous movie shooting: Battery life based on non- stop shooting until the limit (29 minutes) has
been reached, and then continued by pressing the MOVIE (Movie) button again. Other functions,
such as zooming, are not used.
If the remaining battery is not displayed, press the DISP (Display Setting).
[13] How to Use Preparing the camera Charging the battery pack
Supplying power from a wall outlet (wall socket)
By using the supplied AC adaptor, you can shoot and playback images while the power is
supplied from a wall outlet (wall socket) without using up the battery power.
1. Insert the battery pack into the camera.
2. Connect the camera to the wall outlet (wall socket) with a micro USB cable (supplied)
and an AC adaptor (supplied).
Note
The camera will not activate if there is no remaining battery. Insert a sufficiently charged
battery pack into the camera.
If you use the camera while power is being supplied from a wall outlet (wall socket), make
sure that the icon ( ) is displayed on the monitor.
Do not remove the battery pack while power is supplied from a wall outlet (wall socket). If
you remove the battery pack, the camera will be turned off.
Do not remove the battery pack while the access lamp is lit. The data in the memory card
may be damaged.
As long as the power is on, the battery pack will not be charged even if the camera is
connected to the AC Adaptor.
Under certain conditions, power may be supplied from the battery pack supplementarily
even if you are using the AC adaptor.
Do not remove the Micro USB cable while power is supplied from a wall outlet (wall
socket). Before you remove the Micro USB cable, turn off the camera.
Depending on the camera and battery temperature, the continuous recording time may be
shortened while power is supplied from a wall outlet (wall socket).
When using a mobile charger as a power source, confirm that it is fully charged before
use. Also, be careful of the remaining power on the mobile charger during use.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
[14] How to Use Preparing the camera Charging the battery pack
Removing the battery pack
How to remove the battery pack
1. Make sure that the access lamp is not lit, and turn off the camera.
2. Slide lock lever (A) and remove the battery pack.
Be careful not to drop the battery pack.
[15] How to Use Preparing the camera Inserting a memory card (sold separately)
Inserting a memory card
How to insert a memory card
1. Open the memory card cover.
2. Insert the memory card.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Ensure that the notched corner is facing in the correct direction.
With the notched corner facing in the direction illustrated, insert the memory card
until it clicks into place.
3. Close the memory card cover.
Hint
When you use a memory card with this product for the first time, it is recommended that
you format the card using the product for stable performance of the memory card.
[16] How to Use Preparing the camera Inserting a memory card (sold separately)
Removing the memory card
How to remove the memory card
1. Open the memory card cover.
2. Make sure that the access lamp (A) is not lit.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
3. Push in on the memory card once to remove it.
4. Close the memory card cover.
[17] How to Use Preparing the camera Inserting a memory card (sold separately)
Usable memory cards
You can use the following types of memory cards with this camera.
For movies, refer to “Memory cards that can be used for movie recording” on this page.
Usable Memory Stick media
Memory Stick PRO Duo / Memory Stick PRO Duo (Mark2)
Memory Stick PRO-HG Duo
Memory Stick Micro (M2) (Mark2)
*Memory Stick media with a capacity of up to 32 GB have been tested and proven to operate
with this camera.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Usable SD cards
SD memory card / SDHC memory card
SDXC memory card
microSD memory card / microSDHC memory card
microSDXC memory card
*SD cards with a capacity of up to 128 GB have been tested and proven to operate with this
camera.
Memory cards that can be used for movie recording
When shooting movies in XAVC S format
SDXC memory card or microSDXC memory card with a capacity of 64 GB or more (SD
Speed Class 10, or UHS Speed Class U1 or faster)
When recording in 100 Mbps or more, an UHS-I-compatible SDXC memory card or
microSDXC memory card with a capacity of 64 GB or more (UHS Speed Class U3) is
required.
When shooting movies in AVCHD or MP4 format
Memory Stick PRO Duo (Mark2)
Memory Stick PRO-HG Duo
Memory Stick Micro (M2) (Mark2)
SD memory card / microSD memory card (SD Speed Class 4 or faster, or UHS Speed
Class U1 or faster)
SDHC memory card / microSDHC memory card (SD Speed Class 4 or faster, or UHS
Speed Class U1 or faster)
SDXC memory card / microSDXC memory card (SD Speed Class 4 or faster, or UHS
Speed Class U1 or faster)
Note
Not all memory cards are guaranteed to operate correctly.
When you use a memory card with the camera for the first time, it is recommended that
you format the card on the camera before use for more stable performance of the memory
card.
Note that formatting erases all data on the memory card permanently, and is irreversible.
Save valuable data on a computer, etc.
Images recorded on an SDXC memory card cannot be imported to or played on
computers or AV devices that are not compatible with exFAT when connected using a
micro USB cable. Make sure that the device is compatible with exFAT before connecting
it to the camera. If you connect your camera to an incompatible device, you may be
prompted to format the card. Never format the card in response to this prompt, as doing
so will erase all data on the card. (exFAT is the file system used on SDXC memory
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
cards.)
[18] How to Use Preparing the camera Attaching a lens
Attaching the lens hood
We recommend that you use the lens hood to prevent light outside the shooting frame from
affecting the image.
1. Match the shape of the lens hood mounting part and lens head, and turn the lens hood
clockwise until it clicks.
Note
Attach the lens hood properly. Otherwise, the lens hood may not have any effect or may
be partially reflected in the image.
When the lens hood is attached properly, the lens hood index (red line) matches the red
index mark on the hood. (There may be no lens hood index on some lenses.)
Remove the lens hood when using the flash. Otherwise, the lens hood blocks the flash
light and may appear as a shadow on the image.
To store the lens hood after shooting, attach the lens hood to the lens backward.
[19] How to Use Preparing the camera Setting the language, date and time
Setting language, date and time
When you turn on the camera for the first time or after you have initialized the functions, the
setting screen for language, date and time will appear.
1. Turn on the camera.
The language setting screen will appear and then setting screen for date and time will
appear.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
2. Select your language, and then press .
3. Check that [Enter] is selected on the screen, then press on the control wheel.
4. Select your desired geographic location, and then press .
5. Select a setting item using the up/down side of the control wheel or by turning the
control wheel, then press in the center.
6. Set [Daylight Savings], [Date/Time], and [Date Format] using the up/down/left/right
sides, then press in the center.
Midnight is indicated as 12:00 AM, and noon as 12:00 PM.
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to set other items, then select [Enter] and press in the center.
To cancel the date and time setting procedure, press the MENU button.
Note
If the date and time setting is cancelled halfway, the setting screen for the date and time
appears every time you turn on the camera.
[20] How to Use Confirming the operation method Confirming the operation method
Using the control wheel
You can select setting items by turning or pressing the top/bottom/right/left side of the control
wheel. Your selection is determined when you press on the center of the control wheel.
The DISP (Display Setting) is assigned to the top side of the control wheel. You can assign
selected functions to the left/right/bottom side of the control wheel or to in the center,
and to the rotation of the control wheel.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
During playback, you can display the next/previous image by pressing the right/left side of
the control wheel or by turning the control wheel.
[21] How to Use Confirming the operation method Confirming the operation method
Using the manual ring
By turning the manual ring (A), you can change the desired settings instantly for various
shooting modes.
Icons and function names are displayed on the screen as follows.
Ex.
: Adjust zoom by turning the manual ring.
[22] How to Use Confirming the operation method Confirming the operation method
Using the control dial
By turning the control dial (A), you can instantly change settings as needed for various
shooting modes.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Icons and function names are displayed on the screen as follows.
Ex.
: Tv: shutter speed
[23] How to Use Confirming the operation method Confirming the operation method
Using MENU items
In this section, you learn how to change settings related to all camera operations and
execute camera functions including shooting, playback, and operation methods.
1. Press MENU button to display the MENU items.
2. Select the desired MENU item using the up/down/left/right side of the control wheel or
by turning the control wheel, and then press in the center of the control wheel.
The display may move directly from step 1 to step 3 depending on the [Tile Menu]
setting.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
3. Select the desired setting item by pressing the up/down/left/right side on the control
wheel or by turning the control wheel, and then press on the center of the control
wheel.
Select an icon at the top of the screen and press the left/right side of the control
wheel to move to another MENU item.
4. Select the desired setting value, and press to confirm.
[24] How to Use Confirming the operation method Confirming the operation method
Using the Fn (Function) button
You can register frequently used functions to the Fn (function) button and recall them while
shooting. Up to 12 frequently used functions can be registered to the Fn (Function) button.
1. Press the DISP button, and then press the Fn (Function) button in a screen mode other
than [For viewfinder].
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
2. Select a function to be registered by pressing the up/down/left/right side of the control
wheel.
3. Select the desired setting by turning the control wheel, and press in the center of
the control wheel.
Some functions can be fine-tuned using the control dial.
Performing settings on the dedicated screen
Select the desired function in step 2, then press on the center of the control wheel. The
dedicated setting screen for the function appears. Follow the operating guide (A) to perform
the settings.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
[25] How to Use Confirming the operation method Confirming the operation method
Using the "Quick Navi"
You can change the settings directly using the Quick Navi screen when using the viewfinder.
The displayed contents and their position are just a guideline, and may differ from the actual
display.
1. MENU→ (Custom Settings) → [DISP Button] → [Monitor] → [For viewfinder] →
[Enter].
2. Press the DISP (Display Setting) button on the control wheel repeatedly until the screen
is set to [For viewfinder].
3. Press Fn (Function) button to switch the screen to Quick Navi screen.
In Auto Mode or Scene Selection mode
In P/A/S/M/Sweep Panorama mode
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
4. Select the desired function by pressing the up/down/left/right side of the control wheel.
5. Turn the control wheel to select the desired setting.
Some setting values can be finely adjusted by turning the control dial.
Performing settings on the dedicated screen
Select the desired function in step 4, then press on the center of the control wheel. The
dedicated setting screen for the function appears. Follow the operating guide (A) to perform
the settings.
Note
Gray items on the Quick Navi screen are not available.
When using [Creative Style] or [Picture Profile], some of the setup tasks can be
accomplished only on a designated screen.
[26] How to Use Shooting Shooting still images/movies
Shooting still images
Shoots still images.
1. Set the shooting mode to (Auto Mode).
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
2. Adjust the monitor angle, and hold the camera. Or look through the viewfinder and hold
the camera.
3. Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.
When the image is in focus, the indicator ( or ) lights up.
The shortest shooting distance is approximately 3 cm (0.10 ft) (W), 25 cm (0.82 ft)
(T) (from the lens).
4. Press the shutter button fully down.
Focus indicator
lights:
Image is in the focus.
flashes:
The focusing has failed.
lights:
Image is in the focus. The focused position will change to suit the motion of the subject.
lights:
The focusing is in progress.
Hint
When the product cannot focus automatically, the focus indicator flashes and the beep
does not sound. Either recompose the shot or change the focus setting.
Focusing may be difficult in the following situations:
It is dark and the subject is distant.
The contrast of the subject is poor.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
The subject is seen through glass.
The subject is moving quickly.
There is reflective light or shiny surfaces.
There is a flashing light.
The subject is backlit.
[27] How to Use Shooting Shooting still images/movies
Shooting movies
You can record movies by pressing the MOVIE (Movie) button.
1. Press the MOVIE button to start recording.
2. Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.
Hint
You can assign the start/stop movie recording function to a preferred key. MENU→
(Custom Settings) → [Custom Key Settings] → set the function to the preferred key.
When you want to specify the area to be focused on, set the area using [Focus Area].
To keep the focus on a face, arrange the composition so that the focus area frame and
face detection frame overlap, or set the [Focus Area] to [Wide].
Note
To adjust the shutter speed and aperture value to the desired settings, set the shooting
mode to (Movie).
If you use a function such as zoom while shooting a movie, the noise of the lens operating
will be recorded. The sound of the MOVIE button operating may also be recorded when
you press the MOVIE button to stop recording.
For the continuous shooting time of a movie recording, refer to “Recordable time of
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
movies.” When movie recording is finished, you can restart recording by pressing the
MOVIE button again. Recording may stop to protect the product, depending on the
temperature of the product or the battery.
When shooting, the sound of the shoulder strap hooks (triangular hook) could be
recorded, depending on the situation used.
When the mode dial is set to (Movie) or when shooting movies, you cannot select
[Lock-on AF] for [Focus Area].
[28] How to Use Shooting Selecting a shooting mode
List of mode dial functions
You can select the desired shooting mode by turning the mode dial.
Available functions
(Auto Mode):
Allows you to shoot still images of any subject under any condition with good results by
setting the values determined appropriate by the product.
(Program Auto):
Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and
the aperture value (F value)). Also you can select various settings using the menu.
(Aperture Priority):
Allows you to adjust the aperture and shoot when you want to blur the background, etc.
(Shutter Priority):
Allows you to shoot fast-moving subjects etc., by manually adjusting the shutter speed.
(Manual Exposure):
Allows you to shoot still images with the desired exposure by adjusting the exposure (both
the shutter speed and the aperture value (F value)).
MR (Memory recall):
Allows you to shoot an image after recalling often-used modes or numeric settings
registered in advance.
(Movie):
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Allows you to change the setting for movie recording.
(High Frame Rate):
Allows you to shoot slow motion movies. Select a frame rate higher than the playback frame
rate to shoot smooth slow motion movies.
(Sweep Panorama):
Allows you to shoot a panoramic image by compositing the images.
SCN (Scene Selection):
Allows you to shoot with preset settings according to the scene.
[29] How to Use Shooting Selecting a shooting mode
Intelligent Auto
The camera shoots with automatic scene recognition.
1. Set the mode dial to (Auto Mode).
2. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Auto Mode] → [Intelligent Auto].
When [Mode Dial Guide] is set to [On], you can select the desired settings after you
have changed the position of the mode dial.
3. Point the camera to the subject.
When the camera recognized the scene, the icon for the recognized scene appears on
the screen.
4. Adjust the focus and shoot the image.
Note
The product will not recognize the scene when you shoot images with zoom functions
other than optical zoom.
The product may not properly recognize the scene under certain shooting conditions.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
[30] How to Use Shooting Selecting a shooting mode
Superior Auto
The camera shoots with automatic scene recognition. This mode takes clear images of dark
or backlit scenes.
For low-lit or backlit scenes, if necessary the camera may shoot multiple images and create
a composite image, etc., to record higher quality images than in Intelligent Auto mode.
1. Set the mode dial to (Auto Mode).
2. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Auto Mode] → [Superior Auto].
When [Mode Dial Guide] is set to [On], you can select the desired settings after you
have changed the position of the mode dial.
3. Point the camera to the subject.
When the camera recognizes a scene, the scene recognition icon appears on the
screen. If necessary, (overlay icon) may appear.
4. Adjust the focus and shoot the image.
Note
When the product is used to create composite images, the recording process takes longer
than usual.
The product will not recognize the scene when you use zoom functions other than optical
zoom.
The product may not properly recognize a scene under some shooting conditions.
When [ Quality] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], the product cannot create a
composite image.
[31] How to Use Shooting Selecting a shooting mode
About Scene Recognition
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Scene Recognition operates in [Intelligent Auto] mode and [Superior Auto] mode.
This function allows the product to automatically recognize the shooting conditions and
shoot the image.
Scene Recognition:
When the product recognizes certain scenes, the following icons and guides are displayed
on the first line:
(Portrait)
(Infant)
(Night Portrait)
(Night Scene)
(Backlight Portrait)
(Backlight)
(Landscape)
(Macro)
(Spotlight)
(Low Light)
When the product recognizes certain conditions, the following icons are displayed on the
second line:
(Tripod)
(Move)
(Move (Bright))
(Move (Dark))
Note
When [Smile/Face Detect.] is set to [Off], the [Portrait], [Backlight Portrait], [Night Portrait]
and [Infant] scenes are not recognized.
[32] How to Use Shooting Selecting a shooting mode
The advantages of automatic shooting
This camera is equipped with the following three automatic shooting modes: [Intelligent
Auto], [Superior Auto], and [Program Auto].
(Intelligent Auto):
Allows you to shoot with automatic scene recognition.
(Superior Auto):
Allows you to shoot with automatic scene recognition. This mode takes clear images of dark
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
or backlit scenes.
P (Program Auto):
Allows you to adjust various shooting settings such as white balance or ISO value, etc.
Aperture value and shutter speed are automatically set by the camera.
Hint
In [Superior Auto] mode and when the (overlay icon) is displayed, be sure not to
move the camera before the multiple shots are recorded.
In [Program Auto] mode, you can change the combination of shutter speed and aperture
value while maintaining the correct exposure by turning the control dial. This function is
called "Program Shift" (P*).
Note
In [Superior Auto] mode, the recording process takes longer, since the product creates a
composite image. In this case, the (overlay icon) is displayed and the shutter sound
is heard multiple times, but only one image is recorded.
For [Intelligent Auto] and [Superior Auto] mode, most of the functions are set
automatically, and you cannot adjust the settings on your own.
[33] How to Use Shooting Selecting a shooting mode
Program Auto
Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and
the aperture value).
You can set shooting functions such as [ISO].
1. Set the mode dial to P (Program Auto).
2. Set the shooting functions to your desired settings.
3. Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.
Program Shift
You can change the shutter speed and aperture (F-value) combination by rotating the
control dial, without changing the appropriate exposure that is set by this product. This
function is available when you do not use the flash.
“P” on the screen changes to “P*” when you turn the control dial.
To cancel program shift, set the shooting mode to other than [Program Auto], or turn off
the camera.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Note
According to the brightness of the environment, the program shift may not be used.
Set the shooting mode to another one than “P” or turn off the power to cancel the setting
you made.
When the brightness changes, the aperture (F-value) and shutter speed also change
while maintaining the shift amount.
[34] How to Use Shooting Selecting a shooting mode
Sweep Panorama
Allows you to create a single panoramic image from multiple images shot while panning the
camera.
1. Set the mode dial to (Sweep Panorama).
2. Point the camera at the subject.
3. While pressing the shutter button halfway down, aim the camera at one end of the
desired panoramic composition.
(A) This part will not be shot.
4. Press the shutter button fully down.
5. Pan the camera to the end of the guide in the direction of the arrow on the monitor.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
(B) Guidance bar
Note
If the entire angle of the panoramic shot is not achieved within the set time, a gray area
occurs in the composite image. If this happens, move the product faster to record the full
panoramic image.
When [Wide] is selected for [Panorama: Size], the entire angle of the panoramic shot may
not be achieved within the given time. If this happens, try shooting after changing
[Panorama: Size] to [Standard].
Since several images are stitched together, the stitched part may not be recorded
smoothly in some cases.
The images may be blurred in dark scenes.
When a light source such as a fluorescent light flickers, the brightness and color of a
stitched image may not be consistent.
When the whole angle of panoramic shooting and the AE/AF locked angle are very
different in brightness and focus, the shooting may not be successful. If this happens,
change AE/AF locked angle and shoot again.
The following situations are not suited for shooting Sweep Panorama:
Moving subjects.
Subjects that are too close to the product.
Subjects with continuously similar patterns, such as the sky, beach, or a lawn.
Subjects with constant change such as waves or water falls.
Subjects with brightness widely different from its surroundings such as the sun or a light bulb.
The Sweep Panorama shooting may be interrupted in the following situations.
When the camera is panned too fast or too slow.
The subject is too blurry.
Hint
You can turn the control dial on the shooting screen to select the shooting direction.
[35] How to Use Shooting Selecting a shooting mode
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Scene Selection
Allows you to shoot with preset settings according to the scene.
1. Set the mode dial to SCN (Scene Selection).
2. Turn the control dial to select the desired setting.
When [Mode Dial Guide] is set to [On], you can select the desired settings after you
have changed the position of the mode dial.
Menu item details
Portrait:
Blurs background and sharpens the subject. Accentuates the skin tones softly.
Sports Action:
Shoots a moving subject at a fast shutter speed so that the subject looks as if it is standing
still. The product shoots images continuously while the shutter button is pressed.
Macro:
Shoots close-ups of the subjects, such as flowers, insects, food, or small items.
Landscape:
Shoots the entire range of a scenery in sharp focus with vivid colors.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Sunset:
Shoots the red of the sunset beautifully.
Night Scene:
Shoots night scenes without losing the dark atmosphere.
Hand-held Twilight:
Shoots night scenes with less noise and blur without using a tripod. A burst of shots are
taken, and image processing is applied to reduce subject blur, camera-shake, and noise.
Night Portrait:
Shoots night scene portraits using the flash.
Anti Motion Blur:
Allows you to shoot indoor shots without using the flash and reduces subject blur. The
product shoots burst images and combines them to create the image, reducing subject blur
and noise.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Note
Under the following settings, the shutter speed is slower, so use of a tripod is
recommended to prevent the image from blurring:
[Night Scene]
[Night Portrait]
In the [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur] mode, the shutter clicks 4 times and an
image is recorded.
If you select [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur] with [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], the
image quality becomes [Fine] temporarily.
Reducing blur is less effective even in [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur] when
shooting the following subjects:
Subjects with erratic movement.
Subjects that are too close to the product.
Subjects with continuously similar patterns, such as the sky, a beach, or a lawn.
Subjects with constant change such as waves or water falls.
In the case of [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur], block noise may occur when
using a light source that flickers, such as fluorescent lighting.
The minimum distance that you can come close to a subject does not change even if you
select [Macro]. For the minimum in-focus range, refer to the minimum distance of the lens
attached to the product.
Hint
To change the scene, rotate the control dial on the shooting screen and select a new
scene.
[36] How to Use Shooting Selecting a shooting mode
Shutter Priority
You can express the movement of a moving subject in various ways by adjusting the shutter
speed, for example, at the instant of the movement with high speed shutter, or as a trailing
image with low speed shutter. The shutter speed can be changed while recording movies.
1. Set the mode dial to S (Shutter Priority).
2. Select the desired value by turning the control dial.
3. Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.
The aperture is automatically adjusted to obtain proper exposure.
Note
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
If proper exposure cannot be obtained after setup, the aperture value on the shooting
screen blinks. Although you can shoot as it is, resetting is recommended.
Use a tripod to prevent blurring when you use a slow shutter speed.
The SteadyShot warning indicator does not appear in shutter speed priority mode.
When the shutter speed is 1/3 second(s) or longer, noise reduction will be done after
shooting for the same amount of time that the shutter was open. However, you cannot
shoot any more while noise reduction is in progress.
The brightness of the image on the monitor may differ from the actual image being shot.
Hint
When a faster shutter speed is used, moving subjects, such as a running person, cars, or
sea spray come out as if they are frozen in their movements. When a slower shutter
speed is used, a trailing image of the movement of the subject is captured to create a
more natural and dynamic image.
[37] How to Use Shooting Selecting a shooting mode
Aperture Priority
You can shoot by adjusting the aperture and changing the range in focus, or by defocusing
the background. The aperture value can be changed while recording movies.
1. Set the mode dial to A (Aperture Priority).
2. Select the desired value by turning the aperture ring.
Smaller F-value: The subject is in focus, but objects in front of and beyond the
subject are blurred.
Larger F-value: The subject and its foreground and background are all in focus.
3. Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.
The shutter speed is automatically adjusted to obtain proper exposure.
Note
If proper exposure cannot be obtained after setup, the shutter speed on the shooting
screen blinks. Although you can shoot as it is, resetting is recommended.
The brightness of the image on the screen may differ from the actual image being shot.
We recommend that you set the aperture value to between F2.8 and F8 if you want to
shoot images with high resolution. Image quality may deteriorate due to the diffraction
phenomenon.
Hint
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Smaller F-value (opening the aperture) narrows the range that is in focus. This allows you
to put the subject in sharp focus and blur objects in front of and beyond the subject (depth
of field becomes shallower). Larger F-value (narrowing down the aperture) widens the
range that is in focus. This allows you to shoot the depth of the scenery (depth of field
becomes deeper).
You can change the click texture of the aperture ring using the Aperture Click Switch.
When shooting still images, set the Aperture Click Switch to “ON,” and for movies, set it to
“OFF.”
[38] How to Use Shooting Selecting a shooting mode
Manual Exposure
You can shoot with the desired exposure setting by adjusting both the shutter speed and
aperture. The shutter speed and the aperture value can be changed while recording movies.
1. Set the mode dial to M (Manual Exposure).
2. Select the desired aperture value by turning the aperture ring.
Select the desired shutter speed by turning the control dial.
When [ISO] is set to other than [ISO AUTO], use MM (Metered Manual) to check the
exposure value.
Toward +: Images become brighter.
Toward -: Images become darker.
0: Appropriate exposure analyzed by the product.
3. Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.
Note
When [ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO], the ISO value automatically changes to achieve the
appropriate exposure using the aperture value and shutter speed you have set. If the
aperture value and shutter speed you have set are not suitable for appropriate exposure,
the ISO value indicator will blink.
The Metered Manual indicator does not appear when [ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO].
When the amount of ambient light exceeds the metering range of the Metered Manual,
the Metered Manual indicator flashes.
The SteadyShot warning indicator does not appear in manual exposure mode.
The brightness of the image on the monitor may differ from the actual image being shot.
You cannot select [Auto] under [ND Filter].
Hint
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
You can change the shutter speed and aperture (F-value) combination without changing
the set exposure value by rotating the aperture ring while pressing the AEL button.
(Manual shift)
[39] How to Use Shooting Selecting a shooting mode
BULB
You can shoot a trailing image of the movement of a subject with long exposure.
BULB is suitable for shooting trails of light, such as fireworks.
1. Set the mode dial to M (Manual Exposure).
2. Turn the control dial clockwise until [BULB] is indicated.
3. Select the aperture value (F-value) using the aperture ring.
4. Press the shutter button halfway down to adjust the focus.
5. Press and hold the shutter button for the duration of the shooting.
As long as the shutter button is pressed, the shutter remains open.
Note
Since the shutter speed becomes slow and the camera-shake tends to occur more easily,
it is recommended that you use a tripod.
The longer the exposure time, the more noise will be visible on the image.
After shooting, noise reduction will be done for the same amount of time that the shutter
was open. However, you cannot shoot any more while noise reduction is in progress.
You cannot set the shutter speed to [BULB] in the following situations:
When the [Smile Shutter] function is activated.
When the [Auto HDR] function is activated.
When [Picture Effect] is set to [HDR Painting] or [Rich-tone Mono.].
When the [Multi Frame NR] function is activated.
When the [Drive Mode] function is set to the following modes:
[Cont. Shooting]
[Cont. Bracket]
[Spd Priority Cont.]
[Self-timer(Cont)]
When [ Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shut.] .
If you use the above functions when the shutter speed is set to [BULB], the shutter speed
is temporarily set to 30 seconds.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Hint
Images shot in [BULB] mode tend to be blurry. We recommend that you use a tripod or a
remote commander (sold separately) that has a shutter button lock function.
[40] How to Use Shooting Selecting a shooting mode
Memory recall
Allows you to shoot an image after recalling often-used modes or camera settings registered
in advance.
1. Set the mode dial to MR (Memory recall).
2. Press the left/right side of the control wheel or turn the control wheel to select the
desired number, then press on the center.
You can also recall registered modes or settings by selecting MENU →
(Camera Settings) → [Memory recall].
Note
Register shooting settings in advance by [Memory].
If you set [Memory recall] after completing the shooting settings, the registered settings
are given priority and the original settings may become invalid. Check the indicators on
the screen before shooting.
[41] How to Use Shooting Selecting a shooting mode
Movie
You can adjust the shutter speed or aperture value to your desired settings for recording
movies. You can also check the image angle before shooting.
1. Set the mode dial to (Movie).
2. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Movie] → desired setting.
When [Mode Dial Guide] is set to [On], you can select the desired settings after you
have changed the position of the mode dial.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
3. Press the MOVIE (movie) button to start recording.
Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.
Menu item details
Program Auto:
Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and
the aperture value).
Aperture Priority:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.
Shutter Priority:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.
Manual Exposure:
Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture
value) manually.
Note
When you adjust the aperture using the aperture ring while recording a movie, set the
Aperture Click Switch to “OFF.” If you change the aperture value while shooting a movie
with the Aperture Click Switch set to “ON,” the sound of the aperture ring will be recorded.
[42] How to Use Shooting Selecting a shooting mode
Shooting super-slow-motion movies (HFR Settings)
By shooting with a higher frame rate than the recording format, you can record a smooth
super-slow-motion movie.
1. Set the mode dial to (High Frame Rate).
The HFR setting screen will be displayed.
2. Select MENU→ (Camera Settings)→[HFR Settings] and select the desired
settings for [Record Setting], [Frame Rate], [Priority Setting], and [
REC Timing].
You can adjust the desired exposure mode by selecting MENU→ (Camera
Settings)→[High Frame Rate].
You can set other shooting settings such as focus area, focus mode, and frame rate,
and perform zooming on the HFR setting screen.
3. Press the in the center of the control wheel.
The HFR shooting screen will be displayed.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
To change the settings, press in the center once again to switch to the HFR
setting screen.
4. Press the MOVIE (Movie) button.
The camera will automatically start recording as soon as you finish shooting.
Menu item details
Record Setting:
Selects the frame rate of the movie from [60p 50M]/[50p 50M], [30p 50M]/[25p 50M], and
[24p 50M*].
* Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.
Frame Rate:
Selects the shooting frame rate from [240fps]/[250fps], [480fps]/[500fps], and
[960fps]/[1000fps].
Priority Setting:
Select [Quality Priority] or [Shoot Time Priority]. If you select [Shoot Time Priority], the
recordable duration is longer than in [Quality Priority] mode.
REC Timing:
Selects whether to record a set amount of time after pressing the MOVIE button ([Start
Trigger]), or to record for a set amount of time until you press the MOVIE button ([End
Trigger]).
Hint
Shortest shooting distance
The image becomes out of focus when the subject is too close, such as during macro
shooting. Shoot from the shortest shooting distance (W side: Approx. 3 cm (0.10 ft), T
side: Approx. 25 cm (0.82 ft) (from the lens)).
Timing of recording
Depending on the [REC Timing] setting, the relationship between when you press the
MOVIE button and the recorded section of the movie is as shown below.
(A): MOVIE button
(B): Recorded section
[Start Trigger]
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
[End Trigger]
When [ REC Timing] is set to [Start Trigger] and you press the MOVIE button again
during shooting, the camera will end shooting and start recording.
To redo shooting
You can cancel recording by selecting [Cancel] on the screen. However, the movie recorded
up to the point you cancelled will be saved.
Playback speed
The playback speed will vary as below depending on the assigned [Frame Rate] and [
Record Setting].
[Frame Rate]: [240fps]/[250fps]
[Record Setting]: [24p 50M]*
10 times slower
[Record Setting]: [30p 50M]/[25p 50M]
8 times slower/10 times slower
[Record Setting]: [60p 50M]/[50p 50M]
4 times slower/5 times slower
[Frame Rate]: [480fps]/[500fps]
[Record Setting]: [24p 50M]*
20 times slower
[Record Setting]: [30p 50M]/[25p 50M]
16 times slower/20 times slower
[Record Setting]: [60p 50M]/[50p 50M]
8 times slower/10 times slower
[Frame Rate]: [960fps]/[1000fps]
[Record Setting]: [24p 50M]*
40 times slower
[Record Setting]: [30p 50M]/[25p 50M]
32 times slower/40 times slower
[Record Setting]: [60p 50M]/[50p 50M]
16 times slower/20 times slower
*Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.
[Priority Setting] and recordable duration
[Priority Setting]:[Quality Priority]
[Frame Rate]: 240fps/250fps
Effective pixel number read out from image sensor: 1824×1026
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Recordable duration: Approx. 2 seconds
[Frame Rate]: 480fps/500fps
Effective pixel number read out from image sensor: 1676×566
Recordable duration: Approx. 2 seconds
[Frame Rate]: 960fps/1000fps
Effective pixel number read out from image sensor: 1136×384
Recordable duration: Approx. 2 seconds
[Priority Setting]: [Shoot Time Priority]
[Frame Rate]: 240fps/250fps
Effective pixel number read out from image sensor: 1676×566
Recordable duration: Approx. 4 seconds
[Frame Rate]: 480fps/500fps
Effective pixel number read out from image sensor: 1136×384
Recordable duration: Approx. 4 seconds
[Frame Rate]: 960fps/1000fps
Effective pixel number read out from image sensor: 800×270
Recordable duration: Approx. 4 seconds
Note
Sound will not be recorded.
The movie will be recorded in XAVC S HD format.
It may take time for recording to finish after you press the MOVIE button. Wait until the
screen switches to HFR shooting to start the next shooting.
You cannot adjust the exposure, focus settings including manual focus, or zoom scale
after the screen has switched to HFR shooting.
[43] How to Use Using shooting functions Using the zoom
Zoom
Enlarge images using the W/T (zoom) lever when shooting.
1. Enlarge images with the W/T (zoom) lever when shooting.
Move the W/T (zoom) lever to the T side to zoom in and to the W side to zoom out.
Hint
When you select other than [Optical zoom only] for [Zoom Setting], you can exceed the
zoom range of the optical zoom to zoom images.
When the [Focus Mode] function is set to [Single-shot AF] or [Continuous AF], you can
zoom images by rotating the manual ring.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
[44] How to Use Using shooting functions Using the zoom
The zoom features available with this product
The zoom feature of the product provides a higher magnification zoom by combining various
zoom features. The icon displayed on the screen changes, according to the selected zoom
feature.
1. Optical zoom range
Images are magnified within the optical zoom range of this product.
2. Smart Zoom range ( )
Zoom images without causing the original quality to deteriorate by partially cropping an
image (only when the image size is [M], [S] or [VGA]).
3. Clear Image Zoom range ()
Zoom images using an image process with less deterioration. Set [Zoom Setting] to
[On:ClearImage Zoom] or [On:Digital Zoom] first.
4. Digital Zoom range ()
You can magnify images using an image process. When you select [On:Digital Zoom]
for [Zoom Setting], you can use this zoom function.
Note
The default setting for the [Zoom Setting] is [Optical zoom only].
The default setting for [Image Size] is [L]. To use the smart zoom change [ Image
Size] to [M], [S] or [VGA].
Zoom functions other than the optical zoom are not available when shooting in the
following situations:
[ Quality] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG].
[Record Setting] is set to [120p]/[100p].
The mode dial is set to (High Frame Rate).
You cannot use the Smart Zoom function with movies.
Zooming is not available when the screen is set to HFR (High Frame Rate) shooting.
When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, [Metering Mode] fixed to
[Multi].
When using a zoom function other than the optical zoom, the following functions are not
available.
[Smile/Face Detect.]
Lock -on AF
[Auto Obj. Framing]
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
[45] How to Use Using shooting functions Using the zoom
Zoom Setting
You can select the zoom setting of the product.
1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [Zoom Setting] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Optical zoom only:
Optical zoom is activated. You can use the Smart Zoom function if you set [Image Size]
to [M], [S] or [VGA].
On:ClearImage Zoom:
Even if the zoom range of the optical zoom is exceeded, the product magnifies images within
the range in which image quality does not deteriorate significantly.
On:Digital Zoom:
When the zoom range of the [Clear Image Zoom] is exceeded, the product magnifies
images to the largest scale. However, the image quality will deteriorate.
Note
Set [Optical zoom only] if you want to magnify images within the range in which image
quality does not deteriorate.
[46] How to Use Using shooting functions Using the zoom
About zoom scale
The zoom scale that is used in combination with the zoom of the lens changes according to
the selected image size.
When [ Aspect Ratio] is [3:2]
[Zoom Setting] : [Optical zoom only] (including smart zoom)
[Image Size] : L -, M 1.4×, S 2.0×
[Zoom Setting] : [On:ClearImage Zoom]
[Image Size] : L 2.0×, M 2.8×, S 4.0×
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
[Zoom Setting] : [On:Digital Zoom]
[Image Size] : L 4.0×, M 5.6×, S 8.0×
[47] How to Use Using shooting functions Using the zoom
Zoom Speed
Sets the zoom speed of the camera's zoom lever.
1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [Zoom Speed] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Normal:
Sets the zoom speed of the zoom lever to normal.
Fast:
Sets the zoom speed of the zoom lever to fast.
Hint
The [Zoom Speed] settings are also used when you are zooming with a remote controller
(sold separately) connected to the camera.
Note
Selecting [Fast] increases the likelihood that the zoom sound will be recorded.
[48] How to Use Using shooting functions Using the zoom
Smart Telecon.
Smart Teleconverter magnifies and trims the center of the image, then records it.
1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [Custom Key Settings] → assign the [Smart
Telecon.] function to the desired key.
2. Magnify an image by pressing the key to which you have assigned [Smart Telecon.].
The settings change each time you press the key.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
[49] How to Use Using shooting functions Using the zoom
Zoom Func. on Ring
Sets the zoom functions when using the manual ring to change zoom scales. The settings
for [Zoom Func. on Ring] are valid only when auto-focusing.
1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [Zoom Func. on Ring] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Standard:
Zooms in/out smoothly when you operate the zoom by turning the manual ring.
Quick:
Zooms in/out to an angle of view corresponding to how far the manual ring has been rotated.
Step:
Zooms in/out at certain angle steps when you operate the zoom by turning the manual ring.
Note
In the following situations, the zoom function activates as if [Zoom Func. on Ring] is set to
[Standard], even if it is set to [Step].
When using the W/T (zoom) lever to change the zoom scale.
When recording movies.
When using zoom functions other than the optical zoom.
Selecting [Quick] increases the likelihood that the zoom sound will be recorded.
[50] How to Use Using shooting functions Using the flash
Using flash
In dark environments, use the flash to light up the subject while shooting and to prevent
camera-shake. When shooting against the sun, use the flash to lighten the image of the
backlit subject.
1. Press the (Flash pop-up) button to pop up the flash.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
2. Press the shutter button fully down.
When you do not use the flash
When not using the flash, press it back into the camera body.
Note
If you fire the flash before the flash unit pops up entirely, it may cause malfunction.
You cannot use the flash when recording movies.
While charging the flash, flashes. After charging is completed, the flashing icon will
light up.
When an external flash (sold separately) is attached to the Multi Interface Shoe, the state
of the external flash has priority over the setting of the product. You cannot use the
product’s internal flash.
Before attaching/removing an accessory such as a flash to/from the Multi Interface Shoe,
turn off the product first.
When attaching an accessory, insert it fully to the Multi Interface Shoe and screw tightly.
Also, make sure that the accessory is fixed securely to the product.
Do not use a commercially available flash with high-voltage synchro terminals or with
reverse polarity.
When shooting with the flash and the zoom is set to W, the shadow of the lens may
appear on the screen, depending on the shooting conditions. If this happens, shoot away
from the subject or set the zoom to T and shoot with the flash again.
When the monitor is tilted upward more than 90 degrees, it is difficult to operate the
(Flash pop-up) button. Raise the flash unit before adjusting the monitor angle.
[51] How to Use Using shooting functions Using the flash
Notes on using the flash
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
When using the flash, note the following points.
You cannot use the flash when recording movies.
While charging the flash, the indicator flashes. When the charging of the flash is
finished, the indicator lights up.
When an external flash (sold separately) is attached to the Multi Interface Shoe, the state
of the external flash has priority over the flash setting of this product, and you cannot use
the internal flash of this product.
Do not use a commercially available flash with high-voltage synchro terminals or with
reverse polarity, it may cause a malfunction.
[52] How to Use Using shooting functions Using the flash
Flash Mode
You can set the flash mode.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Flash Mode] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Flash Off:
The flash does not operate.
Autoflash:
The flash works in dark environments or when shooting towards bright light.
Fill-flash:
The flash works every time you trigger the shutter.
Slow Sync.:
The flash works every time you trigger the shutter. Slow sync shooting allows you to shoot a
clear image of both the subject and the background by slowing the shutter speed.
Rear Sync.:
The flash works right before the exposure is completed every time you trigger the shutter.
Rear sync shooting allows you to shoot a natural image of the trail of a moving subject such
as a moving car or a walking person.
Wireless:
Using a wireless flash creates a shading effect that gives the subject a more 3D appearance
than when using the camera's flash.
This mode is effective when you attach a remote control-compatible external flash (sold
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
separately) to the product, and shoot with a wireless flash (sold separately), placed away
from the product.
Note
The default setting depends on the shooting mode.
Available flash mode depends on the shooting mode.
The [Wireless] setting cannot be used with the camera’s internal flash.
[53] How to Use Using shooting functions Using the flash
Flash Comp.
Adjusts the amount of flash light in a range of –3.0 EV to +3.0 EV.
Flash compensation changes the amount of flash light only. Exposure compensation
changes the amount of flash light along with the change of the shutter speed and aperture.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Flash Comp.] → desired setting.
Selecting higher values (+ side) makes the flash level higher, and lower values (– side)
makes the flash level lower.
Note
[Flash Comp.] does not work when the shooting mode is set to the following modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Sweep Panorama]
[Scene Selection]
The higher flash effect may not be visible due to the limited amount of flash light
available, if the subject is outside the maximum range of the flash. If the subject is very
close, the lower flash effect may not be visible.
[54] How to Use Using shooting functions Selecting a screen display mode
Switching the screen display (Shooting)
You can change the display contents on the screen.
1. Press the DISP (Display Setting) button.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Each time you press the DISP button, the recording information display changes.
Graphic Display
Display All Info.
No Disp. Info.
Histogram
Level
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
For viewfinder*
*[For viewfinder] is displayed only on the screen.
Some display modes are not available in the default settings.
To change the display modes, press MENU → (Custom Settings) → [DISP Button] and
change the setting.
Note
Histogram is not displayed during panorama shooting.
In movie mode, [For viewfinder] cannot be displayed.
Hint
You can select different settings for both the viewfinder and the monitor. Look through the
viewfinder to set the display settings for the viewfinder.
To hide the grid lines displayed during still image shooting, select MENU → (Custom
Settings) → [Grid Line] → [Off].
To hide the marker displayed during movie recording, select MENU → (Custom
Settings) → [Marker Display] → [Off].
[55] How to Use Using shooting functions Selecting a screen display mode
DISP Button (Finder)
Allows you to set the screen display modes that can be selected for the viewfinder using
(Display Setting) in shooting mode.
1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [DISP Button] → [Finder] → desired setting →
[Enter].
The items marked with are available.
Menu item details
Graphic Display:
Shows basic shooting information. Graphically shows the shutter speed and aperture value.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Display All Info.:
Shows recording information.
No Disp. Info.:
Does not show recording information.
Histogram:
Displays the luminance distribution graphically.
Level:
Indicates whether the product is level in both the horizontal and front-back directions. When
the product is level in both directions, the indicator turns to green.
[56] How to Use Using shooting functions Selecting a screen display mode
DISP Button (Monitor)
Allows you to set the screen display modes that can be selected for the monitor using
(Display Setting) in shooting mode.
1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [DISP Button] → [Monitor] → desired setting →
[Enter].
The items marked with are available.
Menu item details
Graphic Display:
Shows basic shooting information. Graphically shows the shutter speed and aperture value.
Display All Info.:
Shows recording information.
No Disp. Info.:
Does not show recording information.
Histogram:
Displays the luminance distribution graphically.
Level:
Indicates whether the product is level in both the horizontal and front-back directions. When
the product is level in both directions, the indicator turns to green.
For viewfinder:
Displays information suited for shooting with the viewfinder.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
[57] How to Use Using shooting functions Selecting a screen display mode
TC/UB Disp. Switch
Allows you to display the time code (TC) and user bit (UB) of a movie by pressing the key to
which [TC/UB Disp. Switch] function has been assigned.
1. MENU→(Custom Settings)→[Custom Key Settings]→ assign the [TC/UB Disp.
Switch] function to the desired key.
2. Press the key to which [TC/UB Disp. Switch] has been assigned.
Each time you press the key, the monitor display will switch from the movie
recording time counter → time code (TC) → user bit (UB), in that order.
Note
When the monitor is tilted while in shooting mode, such as during self-portrait shooting,
TC/UB information is not displayed. In playback mode, TC/UB information is displayed
even if the monitor is tilted.
[58] How to Use Using shooting functions Selecting still image size/image quality
Image Size (still image)
The larger the image size, the more detail will be reproduced when the image is printed on
large-format paper. The smaller the image size, the more images can be recorded.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [ Image Size] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Image size when [ Aspect Ratio] is 3:2
L: 20M
5472×3648 pixels
M: 10M
3888×2592 pixels
S: 5.0M
2736×1824 pixels
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Image size when [ Aspect Ratio] is 4:3
L: 18M
4864×3648 pixels
M: 10M
3648×2736 pixels
S: 5.0M
2592×1944 pixels
VGA
640×480 pixels
Image size when [ Aspect Ratio] is 16:9
L: 17M
5472×3080 pixels
M: 7.5M
3648×2056 pixels
S: 4.2M
2720×1528 pixels
Image size when [ Aspect Ratio] is 1:1
L: 13M
3648×3648 pixels
M: 6.5M
2544×2544 pixels
S: 3.7M
1920×1920 pixels
Note
When [ Quality] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], the image size for RAW images
corresponds to [L].
[59] How to Use Using shooting functions Selecting still image size/image quality
Aspect Ratio (still image)
Sets the aspect ratio of still images.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Aspect Ratio] → desired setting.
Menu item details
3:2:
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Suitable for standard prints.
4:3:
For shooting in a size suitable for viewing on a computer.
16:9:
For viewing on a high-definition TV.
1:1:
For shooting in composition as a medium format camera.
[60] How to Use Using shooting functions Selecting still image size/image quality
Quality (still image)
Selects the compression format of still images.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [ Quality] → desired setting.
Menu item details
RAW:
File format: RAW (Records using the RAW compression format.)
Digital processing is not performed on this file format. Select this format to process images
on a computer for professional purposes.
The image size is fixed to the maximum size. The image size is not displayed on the
screen.
RAW & JPEG:
File format: RAW (Records using the RAW compression format.) + JPEG
A RAW image and a JPEG image are created at the same time. This is suitable when you
need 2 image files, a JPEG for viewing, and a RAW for editing.
The JPEG image quality is set to [Fine].
Extra fine:
File format: JPEG
The image is compressed in the JPEG format and recorded using a higher quality than with
[Fine].
Fine:
File format: JPEG
The image is compressed in the JPEG format when recorded.
Standard:
File format: JPEG
The image is compressed in the JPEG format when recorded. Since the compression rate of
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
[Standard] is higher than that of [Fine], the file size of [Standard] is smaller than that of
[Fine]. This will allow more files to be recorded on 1 memory card, but the image quality will
be lower.
About RAW images
To open a RAW image file recorded with this camera, the software Image Data Converter
is needed. With Image Data Converter, you can open a RAW image file, then convert it
into a popular image format such as JPEG or TIFF, or readjust the white balance,
saturation or contrast of the image.
You cannot apply [Auto HDR] or [Picture Effect] functions with RAW images.
Note
If you do not intend to edit the images on your computer, we recommend that you record
in JPEG format.
You cannot add DPOF (print order) registration marks to RAW images.
[61] How to Use Using shooting functions Selecting still image size/image quality
Panorama: Size
Sets the image size when shooting panoramic images. The image size varies depending on
the [Panorama: Direction] setting.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Panorama: Size] → desired setting.
Menu item details
When [Panorama: Direction] is [Up] or [Down]
Standard: 3872×2160
Wide: 5536×2160
When [Panorama: Direction] is [Left] or [Right]
Standard: 8192×1856
Wide: 12416×1856
[62] How to Use Using shooting functions Selecting still image size/image quality
Panorama: Direction
Sets the direction to pan the camera when shooting panoramic images.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Panorama: Direction] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Right:
Pan the camera from the left to the right.
Left:
Pan the camera from the right to the left.
Up:
Pan the camera from the bottom to the top.
Down:
Pan the camera from the top to the bottom.
[63] How to Use Using shooting functions Adjusting the focus
Changing the focus method using the focus mode dial
You can select the focusing method to suit the movement of the subject.
1. Turn the focus mode dial (A) to select the desired focus method.
Focus mode details
S (Single-shot AF):
The camera focuses and the focus is locked when you press the shutter button halfway
down. Use this mode when the subject is motionless.
C (Continuous AF):
The camera continues to focus while the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down.
Use this mode when the subject is in motion.
DMF (DMF):
After focusing automatically, make fine focus adjustment manually (Direct Manual Focus).
MF (Manual Focus):
Adjusts the focus manually.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Note
If the subject is too close, the image may show any dust or fingerprints on the lens. Wipe
the lens with a soft cloth, etc.
Once you change the focus method, the set focus distance is erased.
When [Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF], the beep does not sound when focus is
achieved.
Hint
If you cannot achieve focus for the intended subject using auto focus, select MF or DMF,
then shoot again.
[64] How to Use Using shooting functions Adjusting the focus
Focus Area
Selects the focusing area. Use this function when it is difficult to get the proper focus in auto
focus mode. The setting applies to both still images and movies.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Focus Area] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Wide:
Focuses automatically on a subject in all ranges of the image.
When you press the shutter button halfway down in still image shooting mode, a green frame
is displayed around the area that is in focus.
Center:
Focuses automatically on a subject in the center of the image. When used together with the
AF lock function, you can compose the image you want.
Flexible Spot:
Allows you to move the AF range frame to the desired point on the screen and focus on an
extremely small subject in a narrow area.
Expand Flexible Spot:
If the product fails to focus on the single selected point, it uses the focus points around the
flexible spot as the second priority area to achieve focus.
Lock-on AF:
When the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down, the product tracks the subject
within the selected autofocus area. Point the cursor to [Lock-on AF] on the [Focus Area]
setting screen, then select the desired tracking start area using the left/right sides of the
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
control wheel. You can move the tracking start area to a desired point by designating the
area to be the flexible spot or expand flexible spot.
Note
When the mode dial is set to (Movie) or when shooting movies, you cannot select
[Lock-on AF] for [Focus Area].
When the mode dial is set to (Movie) and [Auto Dual Rec] is set to On, the [Focus
Area] is automatically switched to [Wide].
You can select [Lock-on AF] only when the focus mode is set to [Continuous AF].
A dotted square may appear around the whole screen in the clear image zoom, digital
zoom, or smart zoom range in order to focus using the entire frame.
[65] How to Use Using shooting functions Adjusting the focus
Center Lock-on AF
When you press the center button, the camera detects the subject positioned in the center of
the screen and continues to track the subject.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Center Lock-on AF] → [On].
2. Align the target frame (A) over the subject and press in the center of the control
wheel.
Press again to stop tracking.
If the camera loses track of the subject, it can detect when the subject reappears on
the monitor and resume tracking.
3. Press the shutter button fully down to shoot the image.
Note
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
[Center Lock-on AF] may not function very well in the following situations:
The subject is moving too quickly.
The subject is too small, or too large.
The contrast between the subject and the background is poor.
It is dark.
The ambient light changes.
Lock-on AF does not work in the following situations:
In [Sweep Panorama] mode
When [Scene Selection] is set to [Hand- held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur]
When shooting in Manual Focus mode
When using the digital zoom
When the shooting mode is set to Movie, and [SteadyShot] is set to [Intelligent Active].
The camera may not be able to resume tracking for a while after it loses the track of the
subject.
[66] How to Use Using shooting functions Adjusting the focus
Focus-lock
Shoots images with the focus locked on the desired subject in auto focus mode.
1. Select AF-S by rotating the focus mode dial.
2. Place the subject within the AF area and press the shutter button halfway down.
The focus is locked.
3. Keep pressing the shutter button halfway down, and place the subject back in the
original position to re-compose the shot.
4. Press the shutter button down fully to take the picture.
[67] How to Use Using shooting functions Adjusting the focus
Manual Focus
When it is difficult to get the proper focus in autofocus mode, you can adjust the focus
manually. The setting applies to both still images and movies.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
1. Rotate the focus mode dial to select MF.
2. Rotate the manual ring to achieve sharp focus.
When you rotate the manual ring, the focus distance is displayed on the screen.
3. Press the shutter button fully down to take the picture.
Note
When you use the viewfinder, adjust the diopter level to obtain the correct focus on the
viewfinder.
If you re-select the [Focus Mode], any focus distance that you set manually will be
canceled.
[68] How to Use Using shooting functions Adjusting the focus
Direct manual focus (DMF)
You can make fine adjustments manually after the focus is locked.
You can quickly focus on a subject rather than using the manual focus from the beginning.
This is convenient in cases such as macro shooting.
1. Select DMF by rotating the focus mode dial.
2. Press the shutter button halfway down to focus automatically.
3. Keep the shutter button halfway down, rotate the manual ring to achieve a sharper
focus.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
When you rotate the manual ring, the focus distance is displayed on the screen.
4. Press the shutter button fully down to shoot an image.
[69] How to Use Using shooting functions Adjusting the focus
MF Assist (still image)
Enlarges the image on the screen automatically to make manual focusing easier. This works
in Manual Focus or Direct Manual Focus shooting.
1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [MF Assist] → [On].
2. Turn the manual ring to adjust the focus.
The image is enlarged. You can magnify images further by pressing on the
center of the control wheel.
Note
You cannot use [MF Assist] when shooting movies.
Hint
You can set how long the image is to be shown magnified by selecting MENU →
(Custom Settings) → [Focus Magnif. Time].
[70] How to Use Using shooting functions Adjusting the focus
Focus Magnifier
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
You can check the focus by enlarging the image before shooting.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Focus Magnifier].
2. Press on the center of the control wheel to enlarge the image and select the
position you want to enlarge using up/down/left/right side of the control wheel.
When is pressed for the third time, the focus magnifier closes and the normal
shooting display is restored.
3. Confirm the focus.
4. Press the shutter button fully down to shoot the image.
Hint
When focusing manually, you can adjust the focus while an image is magnified.
The [Focus Magnifier] function will be canceled when the shutter button is pressed
halfway.
You can record images while an image is enlarged, but the product records a full-display
image.
The [Focus Magnifier] function will be canceled after shooting.
You can set how long the image is to be shown magnified by selecting MENU →
(Custom Settings) → [Focus Magnif. Time].
[71] How to Use Using shooting functions Adjusting the focus
Focus Magnif. Time
Set the duration for which an image is to be magnified using the [MF Assist] or [Focus
Magnifier] function.
1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [Focus Magnif. Time] → desired setting.
Menu item details
2 Sec:
Magnifies the images for 2 seconds.
5 Sec:
Magnifies the images for 5 seconds.
No Limit:
Magnifies the images until you press the shutter button.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
[72] How to Use Using shooting functions Adjusting the focus
Peaking Level
Enhances the outline of in-focus ranges using a specific color in Manual Focus or Direct
Manual Focus shooting. This function allows you to confirm the focus easily. The setting
applies to both still images and movies.
1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [Peaking Level] → desired setting.
Menu item details
High:
Sets the peaking level to high.
Mid:
Sets the peaking level to middle.
Low:
Sets the peaking level to low.
Off:
Does not use the peaking function.
Note
Since the product determines that sharp areas are in focus, the effect of peaking differs,
depending on the subject and shooting conditions.
The outline of in-focus ranges is not enhanced when the product is connected using an
HDMI cable.
[73] How to Use Using shooting functions Adjusting the focus
Peaking Color
Sets the color used for the peaking function in Manual Focus or Direct Manual Focus
shooting. The setting applies to both still images and movies.
1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [Peaking Color] → desired setting.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Menu item details
Red:
Enhances outlines in red.
Yellow:
Enhances outlines in yellow.
White:
Enhances outlines in white.
[74] How to Use Using shooting functions Adjusting the focus
Pre-AF (still image)
The product automatically adjusts focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.
1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [ Pre-AF] → desired setting.
Menu item details
On:
Adjusts focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.
Off:
Does not adjust focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.
[75] How to Use Using shooting functions Adjusting the focus
AF/MF control
You can easily switch the focusing mode from auto to manual and vice versa while shooting
without changing your holding position. The setting applies to both still images and movies.
1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [Custom Key Settings] → button to be assigned →
[AF/MF Control Hold] or [AF/MF Ctrl Toggle].
Menu item details
AF/MF Control Hold:
Switches the focusing mode while the button is held down.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
AF/MF Ctrl Toggle:
Switches the focusing mode until the button is pressed again.
Note
You cannot set the [AF/MF Control Hold] function to [Left Button], [Right Button] or [Down
Button].
[76] How to Use Using shooting functions Adjusting the focus
AF Illuminator (still image)
The AF illuminator supplies fill light to focus more easily on a subject in dark surroundings.
The red AF illuminator allows the product to focus easily when the shutter button is pressed
halfway, until the focus is locked.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [AF Illuminator] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Auto:
Uses the AF illuminator.
Off:
Does not use the AF illuminator.
Note
You cannot use [AF Illuminator] in the following situations:
In movie mode
In [Sweep Panorama] mode
When [Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF].
When [Scene Selection] is set to the following modes:
[Landscape]
[Sports Action]
[Night Scene]
The AF illuminator emits a very bright light. Although there is no health hazard, do not
look directly into the AF illuminator at close range.
[77] How to Use Using shooting functions Adjusting the focus
Eye AF
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
The camera focuses on the subject's eyes while you keep the button pressed.
1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [Custom Key Settings] → assign the [Eye AF]
function to the desired button.
2. Point the camera at a person's face, and press the button to which you have assigned
the [Eye AF] function.
3. Press the shutter button while pressing the button.
Hint
When the camera focuses on the eyes, a detection frame is displayed over the eyes. If
the focus mode is set to [Single-shot AF], the frame will disappear after a period of time.
Note
Depending on the circumstances, the camera may not be able to focus on the eyes. In
such cases, the camera detects a face and focuses on the face.
If the camera cannot detect a person’s face, you cannot use [Eye AF].
Depending on the circumstances, you cannot use [Eye AF], such as when [Focus Mode]
is set to [Manual Focus], etc.
[Eye AF] may not function in the following situations:
When the person is wearing sunglasses.
When the front hair covers the person’s eyes.
In low- light or back-lit conditions.
When the eyes are closed.
When the person is in the shade.
When the person is out of focus.
When the person is moving too much.
If the person is moving too much, the detection frame may not display correctly over their
eyes.
[78] How to Use Using shooting functions Adjusting the focus
Measuring the exact distance to the subject
The mark shows the location of the image sensor*. When you measure the exact
distance between the product and the subject, refer to the position of the horizontal line.
*The image sensor is the part that converts the light source to a digital signal.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Note
If the subject is closer than the minimum shooting distance of the lens, the focus cannot
be confirmed. Make sure you put enough distance between the subject and the product.
[79] How to Use Using shooting functions Adjusting the exposure
Exposure Comp.
You can adjust the exposure under MENU when the exposure compensation dial is set to
“0.” Based on the exposure value set by auto exposure, you can make the entire image
brighter or darker if you adjust [Exposure Comp.] to the plus side or minus side, respectively
(exposure compensation). Normally, exposure is set automatically (auto exposure).
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Exposure Comp.] → desired setting.
You can adjust the exposure in a range of –3.0 EV to +3.0 EV when the exposure
compensation dial is set to “0.”
Note
You can adjust the exposure in a range of –2.0 EV to +2.0 EV for movies.
If you shoot a subject in extremely bright or dark conditions, or when you use the flash,
you may not be able to get a satisfactory effect.
When the exposure compensation dial is set to other than “0,” settings for the exposure
compensation dial will be prioritized. For example, if you set [Exposure Comp.] to +3.0 EV,
but the exposure compensation dial is set to +2.0 EV, the “+2.0 EV” setting will be
prioritized.
When you set the exposure compensation dial to “0” from a setting other than “0,” the
exposure value switches to “0” even if the exposure has been set to other settings.
When you use [Manual Exposure], you can compensate for the exposure only when [ISO]
is set to [ISO AUTO].
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
[80] How to Use Using shooting functions Adjusting the exposure
Exposure compensation dial
Based on the exposure value set by auto exposure, you can make the entire image brighter
or darker if you adjust [Exposure Comp.] to the plus side or minus side, respectively
(exposure compensation). Normally, exposure is set automatically (auto exposure).
1. Turn the exposure compensation dial.
Note
You can adjust the exposure in a range of −2.0 EV to +2.0 EV for movies.
If you shoot a subject in extremely bright or dark conditions, or when you use the flash,
you may not be able to get a satisfactory effect.
When you use [Manual Exposure], you can compensate for the exposure only when [ISO]
is set to [ISO AUTO].
[81] How to Use Using shooting functions Adjusting the exposure
Metering Mode
Selects the metering mode that sets which part of the screen to measure for determining the
exposure.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Metering Mode] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Multi:
Measures light on each area after dividing the total area into multiple areas and determines
the proper exposure of the entire screen (Multi-pattern metering).
Center:
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Measures the average brightness of the entire screen, while emphasizing the central area of
the screen (Center-weighted metering).
Spot:
Measures only the central area (Spot metering). This function is useful when the subject is
backlit or when there is strong contrast between the subject and the background.
Note
The setting is fixed to [Multi] in the following shooting modes:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
Zoom functions other than optical zoom
[82] How to Use Using shooting functions Adjusting the exposure
AE lock
When the contrast between the subject and background is high, such as when shooting a
backlit subject or a subject near a window, meter the light at a spot where the subject
appears to have the appropriate brightness and lock the exposure before shooting. To
reduce the brightness of the subject, meter the light at a spot brighter than the subject and
lock the exposure of the entire screen. To make the subject brighter, meter the light at a spot
darker than the subject and lock the exposure of the entire screen.
1. Adjust the focus on the spot at which the exposure is adjusted.
2. Press the AEL button.
The exposure is locked, and (AE lock) lights up.
3. Keep pressing the AEL button and focus on the subject again, then shoot the picture.
Keep holding the AEL button down while taking a shot if you want to continue
shooting with the fixed exposure. Release the button to reset the exposure.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Hint
If you select the [AEL toggle] function in (Custom Settings) → [Custom Key Settings],
you can lock the exposure without holding down the AEL button.
[83] How to Use Using shooting functions Adjusting the exposure
AEL w/ shutter (still image)
Sets whether to fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
This function is useful when you want to adjust focus and exposure separately.
1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [AEL w/ shutter] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Auto:
Fixes the exposure after adjusting the focus automatically when you press the shutter button
halfway down when [Focus Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF].
On:
Fixes the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.
Off:
Does not fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Use this mode
when you want to adjust focus and exposure separately.
The product keeps adjusting the exposure while shooting in [Cont. Shooting] or [Spd Priority
Cont.] mode.
Note
Operation using the AEL button is prioritized over the [AEL w/ shutter] settings.
[84] How to Use Using shooting functions Adjusting the exposure
Exp.comp.set
Sets whether to apply the exposure compensation value to control both flash light and
ambient light, or just ambient light.
1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [Exp.comp.set] → desired setting.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Menu item details
Ambient&flash:
Applies the exposure compensation value to control both flash light and ambient light.
Ambient only:
Applies the exposure compensation value to control ambient light only.
[85] How to Use Using shooting functions Adjusting the exposure
Zebra
The zebra pattern will appear over part of an image if the brightness level of that part meets
the IRE level that you set. Use this zebra pattern as a guide to adjust the brightness.
1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [Zebra] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Off:
Does not display the zebra pattern.
70/75/80/85/90/95/100/100+:
Adjusts the brightness level.
Note
The zebra pattern is not displayed during HDMI connection.
[86] How to Use Using shooting functions Adjusting the exposure
Exposure Set. Guide
You can set whether to display a guide when you change the exposure.
1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [Exposure Set. Guide] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Off:
Does not display the guide.
On:
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Displays the guide.
[87] How to Use Using shooting functions Adjusting the exposure
Reset EV Comp.
Sets whether to maintain the exposure value set using [Exposure Comp.] when you turn off
the power when the exposure compensation dial position is set to “0.”
1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [Reset EV Comp.] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Maintain:
Maintains the settings of [Custom Settings].
Reset:
Resets the settings of [Exposure Comp.] to “0.”
[88] How to Use Using shooting functions Selecting a drive mode (Continuous
shooting/Self-timer)
Drive Mode
You can set the drive mode, such as continuous or self-timer shooting.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Drive Mode] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Single Shooting:
Shoots one still image. Normal shooting mode.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Cont. Shooting:
Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button.
Spd Priority Cont.:
Shoots images continuously at high speed while you press and hold down the shutter button.
Self-timer:
Shoots an image using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed
since the shutter button was pressed.
Self-timer(Cont):
Shoots a designated number of images using the self-timer after a designated number of
seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was pressed.
Cont. Bracket:
Shoots images while holding the shutter button down, each with different degrees of
brightness.
Single Bracket:
Shoots a specified number of images, one by one, each with a different degree of
brightness.
WB bracket:
Shoots a total of three images, each with different color tones according to the selected
settings for white balance, color temperature and color filter.
DRO Bracket:
Shoots a total of three images, each at a different degree of D-Range Optimizer.
Note
When the shooting mode is set to [Scene Selection] and [Sports Action] is selected,
[Single Shooting] cannot be performed.
[89] How to Use Using shooting functions Selecting a drive mode (Continuous
shooting/Self-timer)
Cont. Shooting
Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button.
1. MENU→ (Camera Settings) → [Drive Mode] → [Cont. Shooting].
Note
Continuous shooting is unavailable in the following situations:
The shooting mode has been set to [Sweep Panorama].
The shooting mode is set to [Scene Selection] and a scene other than [Sports Action] is selected.
The [Picture Effect] is set to [Soft Focus], [HDR Painting], [Rich-tone Mono.], [Miniature],
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
[Watercolor], or [Illustration].
The [DRO/Auto HDR] is set to [Auto HDR].
[ISO] is set to [Multi Frame NR].
[Smile Shutter] is being used.
Hint
To hold the focus and exposure during burst, change the following settings.
Set [Focus Mode] to [Continuous AF] .
Set [ AEL w/ shutter] to [Off] or [Auto].
[90] How to Use Using shooting functions Selecting a drive mode (Continuous
shooting/Self-timer)
Spd Priority Cont.
The product continues to shoot as long as the shutter button is pressed. You can
continuously shoot at a rate faster than that of [Cont. Shooting].
1. MENU→ (Camera Settings) → [Drive Mode] → [Spd Priority Cont.].
Note
Between continuous shooting frames, an image of each frame is immediately displayed.
Continuous shooting is unavailable in the following situations:
The shooting mode has been set to [Sweep Panorama].
The shooting mode is set to [Scene Selection] and a scene other than [Sports Action] is selected.
The [Picture Effect] is set to [Soft Focus], [HDR Painting], [Rich-tone Mono.], [Miniature],
[Watercolor], or [Illustration].
The [DRO/Auto HDR] is set to [Auto HDR].
[ISO] is set to [Multi Frame NR].
[Smile Shutter] is being used.
Hint
In [Spd Priority Cont.] mode, the focus is determined when you press the shutter button
halfway down for the first image, and locked for subsequent shots. However, the camera
can continue adjusting the exposure for subsequent shots. To keep adjusting the
exposure throughout the continuous shooting, set the settings as follows:
Set [ AEL w/ shutter] to [Auto] or [Off].
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
[91] How to Use Using shooting functions Selecting a drive mode (Continuous
shooting/Self-timer)
Self-timer
Shoots an image using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed
since the shutter button was pressed.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Drive Mode] → [Self-timer].
2. Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.
Menu item details
Self-timer: 10 Sec:
Sets the 10-second delay self-timer.
When you press the shutter button, the self-timer lamp flashes, a beep sounds, and the
shutter operates after 10 seconds. To cancel the self-timer, press the shutter button again.
Self-timer: 5 Sec:
Sets the 5-second delay self-timer.
When you press the shutter button, the self-timer lamp flashes, a beep sounds, and the
shutter operates after 5 seconds. To cancel the self-timer, press the shutter button again.
Self-timer: 2 Sec:
Sets the 2-second delay self-timer. This reduces the camera-shake caused by pressing the
shutter button.
Hint
To cancel the self-timer, select MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Drive Mode] →
[Single Shooting].
To use the self-timer in bracket mode, select bracket mode under drive mode, then select
MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Bracket Settings] → [Selftimer during Brkt].
Note
The self-timer is unavailable in the following situations:
The shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama].
[Sports Action] in [Scene Selection]
[Smile Shutter]
[92] How to Use Using shooting functions Selecting a drive mode (Continuous
shooting/Self-timer)
Self-timer(Cont)
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Shoots a designated number of images using the self-timer after a designated number of
seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was pressed. You can choose the best from
multiple shots.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Drive Mode] → [Self-timer(Cont)].
2. Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.
Menu item details
Self-timer(Cont.): 10 Sec. 3 Img.:
Shoots three frames in succession 10 seconds after you press the shutter button.
When you press the shutter button, the self-timer lamp flashes, a beep sounds, and the
shutter operates after 10 seconds.
Self-timer(Cont.): 10 Sec. 5 Img.:
Shoots five frames in succession 10 seconds after you press the shutter button.
When you press the shutter button, the self-timer lamp flashes, a beep sounds, and the
shutter operates after 10 seconds.
Self-timer(Cont.): 5 Sec. 3 Img.:
Shoots three frames in succession 5 seconds after you press the shutter button. When you
press the shutter button, the self-timer lamp flashes, a beep sounds, and the shutter
operates after 5 seconds.
Self-timer(Cont.): 5 Sec. 5 Img.:
Shoots five frames in succession 5 seconds after you press the shutter button. When you
press the shutter button, the self-timer lamp flashes, a beep sounds, and the shutter
operates after 5 seconds.
Self-timer(Cont.): 2 Sec. 3 Img.:
Shoots three frames in succession 2 seconds after you press the shutter button. When you
press the shutter button, the self-timer lamp flashes, a beep sounds, and the shutter
operates after 2 seconds.
Self-timer(Cont.): 2 Sec. 5 Img.:
Shoots five frames in succession 2 seconds after you press the shutter button. When you
press the shutter button, the self-timer lamp flashes, a beep sounds, and the shutter
operates after 2 seconds.
Hint
To cancel the self-timer, select MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Drive Mode] →
[Single Shooting].
[93] How to Use Using shooting functions Selecting a drive mode (Continuous
shooting/Self-timer)
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Cont. Bracket
Shoots multiple images while automatically shifting the exposure from base to darker and
then to lighter. Press and hold down the shutter button until the bracket recording is
completed.
You can select an image that suits your intention, after recording.
1. MENU→ (Camera Settings) → [Drive Mode] → [Cont. Bracket].
2. Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.
Menu item details
Cont. Bracket: 0.3EV 3 Image:
This setting shoots three images continuously with an exposure value shifted by plus or
minus 0.3 EV.
Cont. Bracket: 0.3EV 5 Image:
This setting shoots five images continuously with an exposure value shifted by plus or minus
0.3 EV.
Cont. Bracket: 0.3EV 9 Image:
This setting shoots nine images continuously with an exposure value shifted by plus or
minus 0.3 EV.
Cont. Bracket: 0.7EV 3 Image:
This setting shoots three images continuously with an exposure value shifted by plus or
minus 0.7 EV.
Cont. Bracket: 0.7EV 5 Image:
This setting shoots five images continuously with an exposure value shifted by plus or minus
0.7 EV.
Cont. Bracket: 0.7EV 9 Image:
This setting shoots nine images continuously with an exposure value shifted by plus or
minus 0.7 EV.
Cont. Bracket: 1.0EV 3 Image:
This setting shoots three images continuously with an exposure value shifted by plus or
minus 1.0 EV.
Cont. Bracket: 1.0EV 5 Image:
This setting shoots five images continuously with an exposure value shifted by plus or minus
1.0 EV.
Cont. Bracket: 1.0EV 9 Image:
This setting shoots nine images continuously with an exposure value shifted by plus or
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
minus 1.0 EV.
Cont. Bracket: 2.0EV 3 Image:
This setting shoots three images continuously with an exposure value shifted by plus or
minus 2.0 EV.
Cont. Bracket: 2.0EV 5 Image:
This setting shoots five images continuously with an exposure value shifted by plus or minus
2.0 EV.
Cont. Bracket: 3.0EV 3 Image:
This setting shoots three images continuously with an exposure value shifted by plus or
minus 3.0 EV.
Cont. Bracket: 3.0EV 5 Image:
This setting shoots five images continuously with an exposure value shifted by plus or minus
3.0 EV.
Note
The last shot is shown on the Auto Review.
When [ISO AUTO] is selected in [Manual Exposure] mode, the exposure is changed by
adjusting the ISO value. If a setting other than [ISO AUTO] is selected, the exposure is
changed by adjusting the shutter speed.
When you adjust the exposure, the exposure is shifted based on the compensated value.
Bracket shooting is unavailable in the following situations:
The shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], [Superior Auto], [Scene Selection], or [Sweep
Panorama].
When the flash is used, the product performs flash bracket shooting, which shifts the
amount of flash light even if [Cont. Bracket] is selected. Press the shutter button for each
image.
[94] How to Use Using shooting functions Selecting a drive mode (Continuous
shooting/Self-timer)
Single Bracket
Shoots multiple images while automatically shifting the exposure from base to darker and
then to lighter. Press the shutter button for each image. You can select an image that suits
your purpose after recording.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Drive Mode] → [Single Bracket].
2. Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Menu item details
Single Bracket: 0.3EV 3 Image:
This setting shoots a total of three images in a row with an exposure value shifted by plus or
minus 0.3 EV.
Single Bracket: 0.3EV 5 Image:
This setting shoots a total of five images in a row with an exposure value shifted by plus or
minus 0.3 EV.
Single Bracket: 0.3EV 9 Image:
This setting shoots a total of nine images in a row with an exposure value shifted by plus or
minus 0.3 EV.
Single Bracket: 0.7EV 3 Image:
This setting shoots a total of three images in a row with an exposure value shifted by plus or
minus 0.7 EV.
Single Bracket: 0.7EV 5 Image:
This setting shoots a total of five images in a row with an exposure value shifted by plus or
minus 0.7 EV.
Single Bracket: 0.7EV 9 Image:
This setting shoots a total of nine images in a row with an exposure value shifted by plus or
minus 0.7 EV.
Single Bracket: 1.0EV 3 Image:
This setting shoots a total of three images in a row with an exposure value shifted by plus or
minus 1.0 EV.
Single Bracket: 1.0EV 5 Image:
This setting shoots a total of five images in a row with an exposure value shifted by plus or
minus 1.0 EV.
Single Bracket: 1.0EV 9 Image:
This setting shoots a total of nine images in a row with an exposure value shifted by plus or
minus 1.0 EV.
Single Bracket: 2.0EV 3 Image:
This setting shoots a total of three images in a row with an exposure value shifted by plus or
minus 2.0 EV.
Single Bracket: 2.0EV 5 Image:
This setting shoots a total of five images in a row with an exposure value shifted by plus or
minus 2.0 EV.
Single Bracket: 3.0EV 3 Image:
This setting shoots a total of three images in a row with an exposure value shifted by plus or
minus 3.0 EV.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Single Bracket: 3.0EV 5 Image:
This setting shoots a total of five images in a row with an exposure value shifted by plus or
minus 3.0 EV.
Note
When [ISO AUTO] is selected in [Manual Exposure] mode, the exposure is changed by
adjusting the ISO value. If a setting other than [ISO AUTO] is selected, the exposure is
changed by adjusting the shutter speed.
When you adjust the exposure, the exposure is shifted based on the compensated value.
Bracket shooting is unavailable in the following situations:
The shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], [Superior Auto], [Scene Selection], or [Sweep
Panorama].
[95] How to Use Using shooting functions Selecting a drive mode (Continuous
shooting/Self-timer)
WB bracket
Shoots three images, each with different color tones according to the selected settings of
white balance, color temperature and color filter.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Drive Mode] → [WB bracket].
2. Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.
Menu item details
White Balance Bracket: Lo:
Records a series of three images with small changes in the white balance.
White Balance Bracket: Hi:
Records a series of three images with large changes in the white balance.
Note
The last shot is shown on the Auto Review.
[96] How to Use Using shooting functions Selecting a drive mode (Continuous
shooting/Self-timer)
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
DRO Bracket
You can record a total of three images, each at a different degree of D-Range Optimizer
value.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Drive Mode] → [DRO Bracket].
2. Select the desired mode using the right/left side of the control wheel.
Menu item details
DRO Bracket: Lo:
Records a series of three images with small changes in the D-Range Optimizer value.
DRO Bracket: Hi:
Records a series of three images with large changes in the D-Range Optimizer value.
Note
The last shot is shown on the Auto Review.
[97] How to Use Using shooting functions Selecting a drive mode (Continuous
shooting/Self-timer)
Settings for bracket shooting
You can set the self-timer in bracket shooting mode, and the shooting order for exposure
bracketing and white balance bracketing.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Drive Mode] → select bracket shooting mode.
2. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Bracket Settings] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Selftimer during Brkt:
Sets whether to use the self-timer during bracket shooting. Also sets the number of seconds
until the shutter is released if using the self-timer.
(OFF/2 Sec/5 Sec/10 Sec)
Bracket order:
Sets the order of exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.
(0→-→+/-→0→+)
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
[98] How to Use Using shooting functions Selecting a drive mode (Continuous
shooting/Self-timer)
Indicator during bracket shooting
Viewfinder
Ambient light* bracketing
3 images shifted by 0.3 EV steps
Exposure compensation ±0.0 steps
Monitor (Display All Info. or Histogram)
Ambient light* bracketing
3 images shifted by 0.3 EV steps
Exposure compensation ±0.0 steps
Flash bracketing
3 images shifted by 0.7 EV steps
Flash compensation -1.0 step
Monitor (For viewfinder)
Ambient light* bracketing
3 images shifted by 0.3 EV steps
Exposure compensation ±0.0 steps
Flash bracketing
3 images shifted by 0.7 EV steps
Flash compensation -1.0 step
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
*Ambient light: A generic term for non-flash light including natural light, electric bulb and
fluorescent lighting. Whereas the flash light blinks for a moment, ambient light is constant, so this
kind of light is called "ambient light."
Note
During bracket shooting, guides equal to the number of images to be shot are displayed
over/under the bracket indicator.
When you start bracket shooting, the guides will disappear one by one as the camera
records images.
[99] How to Use Using shooting functions Selecting the ISO sensitivity
ISO
Sensitivity to light is expressed by the ISO number (recommended exposure index). The
larger the number, the higher the sensitivity.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [ISO] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Multi Frame NR:
Combines continuous shots to create an image with less noise. Select the desired ISO
number from [ISO AUTO] or ISO 100 – 25600.
ISO AUTO:
Sets the ISO sensitivity automatically.
ISO 64 – ISO 12800:
Sets the ISO sensitivity manually. Selecting a larger number increases the ISO sensitivity.
Note
[ISO AUTO] is selected when using the following functions:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
[Sweep Panorama]
When [ISO] is set to a value lower than ISO 100, the range for recordable subject
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
brightness (dynamic range) may decrease.
The higher the ISO value, the more noise will appear on the images.
When shooting movies, ISO values between ISO 100 and ISO 12800 are available.
The available ISO settings will differ depending on whether you are shooting still images,
shooting movies, or using HFR.
When you use [Multi Frame NR], it takes some time for the product to perform the overlay
processing of images.
Hint
You can change the automatically set ISO sensitivity range for the [ISO AUTO] mode.
Select [ISO AUTO] and press the right side of the control wheel, and set the desired
values for [ISO AUTO Maximum] and [ISO AUTO Minimum]. The values for [ISO AUTO
Maximum] and [ISO AUTO Minimum] are also applied when shooting in [ISO AUTO]
mode under [Multi Frame NR].
[100] How to Use Using shooting functions Selecting the ISO sensitivity
ISO AUTO Min. SS
If you select [ISO AUTO] or [ISO AUTO] under [Multi Frame NR] when the shooting mode is
P (Program Auto) or A (Aperture Priority), you can set the shutter speed at which the ISO
sensitivity starts changing.
This function is effective for shooting moving subjects. You can minimize subject blurring
while also preventing camera shake.
1. MENU→ (Camera Settings)→[ISO AUTO Min. SS]→desired setting.
Menu item details
FASTER (Faster)/FAST (Fast):
The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds faster than [Standard], so you can
prevent camera shake and subject blurring.
STD (Standard):
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed based on the focal length of the lens.
SLOW (Slow)/SLOWER (Slower):
The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds slower than [Standard], so you can
shoot images with less noise.
1/32000―30":
The ISO sensitivity starts to change at the shutter speed you have set.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Hint
The difference in shutter speed at which ISO sensitivity starts to change between [Faster],
[Fast], [Standard], [Slow], and [Slower] is 1 EV.
Note
If the exposure is insufficient even when the ISO sensitivity is set to [ISO AUTO
Maximum] in [ISO AUTO], in order to shoot with an appropriate exposure, the shutter
speed will be slower than the speed set in [ISO AUTO Min. SS].
In the following situations, the shutter speed may not function as set:
When the maximum shutter speed has changed based on the aperture or the [Shutter Type]
setting.
When using the flash to shoot bright scenes with the [Shutter Type] set to [Electronic Shut.] .
(The maximum shutter speed is limited to the flash -synching speed of 1/100 seconds.)
When using the flash to shoot dark scenes with the [Flash Mode] set to [Fill-flash] or [Wireless].
(The minimum shutter speed is limited to the speed automatically determined by the camera.)
[101] How to Use Using shooting functions Selecting the ISO sensitivity
Multi Frame NR
The product automatically shoots multiple images continuously, combines them, reduces the
noise, and records them as one image. With multi frame noise reduction, you can select
larger ISO numbers than the maximum ISO sensitivity. The image recorded is one combined
image.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [ISO] → [Multi Frame NR].
2. Press the right side of the control wheel to display the setting screen, then select a
desired value using the top/bottom side of the control wheel.
Note
When [ Quality] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], this function cannot be used.
The flash, [D-Range Opt.], and [Auto HDR] cannot be used.
When [Picture Profile] is set to something other than [Off], you cannot set [Multi Frame
NR].
When [Picture Effect] is set to something other than [Off], you cannot set [Multi Frame
NR].
Hint
You can change the automatically set range of ISO sensitivity in the [ISO AUTO] mode
under [Multi Frame NR]. Select [ISO AUTO] under [ISO] and press the right side of the
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
control wheel, and set the desired values for [ISO AUTO Maximum] and [ISO AUTO
Minimum]. The values for [ISO AUTO Maximum] and [ISO AUTO Minimum] are also
applied when shooting in [ISO AUTO] mode under [Multi Frame NR].
[102] How to Use Using shooting functions Correcting the brightness or contrast
D-Range Opt. (DRO)
By dividing the image into small areas, the product analyzes the contrast of light and shadow
between the subject and the background, and creates an image with the optimal brightness
and gradation.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [DRO/Auto HDR] → [D-Range Opt.].
2. Select the desired setting using the left/right side of the control wheel.
Menu item details
D-Range Optimizer: Auto:
Corrects the brightness automatically.
D-Range Optimizer: Lv1 ― D-Range Optimizer: Lv5:
Optimizes the gradation of a recorded image for each divided area. Select the optimization
level from Lv1 (weak) to Lv5 (strong).
Note
[DRO/Auto HDR] is fixed to [Off] when the shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama], or
when [Multi Frame NR] or [Picture Effect] is set to other than [Off].
[DRO/Auto HDR] is fixed to [Off] when [Picture Profile] is set to something other than
[Off].
[DRO/Auto HDR] is fixed to [Off] when the following modes are selected in [Scene
Selection].
[Sunset]
[Night Scene]
[Night Portrait]
[Hand- held Twilight]
[Anti Motion Blur]
The setting is fixed to [D-Range Optimizer: Auto] when [Scene Selection] modes other
than the above modes are selected.
When [ Record Setting] is set to [120p 100M], [100p 100M], [120p 60M] or [100p
60M], [DRO/Auto HDR] will be set to [Off].
When shooting with [D-Range Opt.], the image may be noisy. Select the proper level by
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
checking the recorded image, especially when you enhance the effect.
[103] How to Use Using shooting functions Correcting the brightness or contrast
Auto HDR
Widens the range (gradation) so that you can record from bright parts to dark parts with
correct brightness (HDR: High Dynamic Range). One image with proper exposure and one
overlaid image are recorded.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [DRO/Auto HDR] → [Auto HDR].
2. Select the desired setting using the left/right side of the control wheel.
Menu item details
Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. Auto:
Corrects the exposure difference automatically.
Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. 1.0EV ― Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. 6.0EV:
Sets the exposure difference, based on the contrast of the subject. Select the optimal level
between 1.0 EV (weak) and 6.0 EV (strong).
For example, if you set the exposure value to 2.0 EV, three images will be composed with
the following exposure levels: −1.0 EV, correct exposure and +1.0 EV.
Note
[Auto HDR] is not available for RAW images.
[Auto HDR] is not available in the following shooting modes.
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Sweep Panorama]
[Scene Selection]
When [Multi Frame NR] is selected, you cannot select [Auto HDR].
When [Picture Effect] is set to something other than [Off], you cannot select [Auto HDR].
When [Picture Profile] is set to something other than [Off], you cannot set [Auto HDR].
You cannot start the next shot until the capture process is completed after you shoot.
You may not obtain the desired effect depending on the luminance difference of a subject
and the shooting conditions.
When the flash is used, this function has little effect.
When the contrast of the scene is low or when product shake or subject blur occurs, you
may not obtain good HDR images. will be displayed over the recorded image to
inform you when the camera detects image blurring. Change the composition or re-shoot
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
the image carefully to avoid image blur, as needed.
[104] How to Use Using shooting functions Adjusting color tones
White Balance
Adjusts the color tones according to the ambient light conditions. Use this feature when the
color tones of the image did not come out as you expected, or when you want to change the
color tones on purpose for photographic expression.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [White Balance] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Auto:
The product automatically detects the light source and adjusts the color tones.
Daylight:
The color tones are adjusted for the daylight.
Shade:
The color tones are adjusted for shadiness.
Cloudy:
The color temperature is adjusted for a cloudy sky.
Incandescent:
The color temperature is adjusted for places under an incandescent lamp, or under bright
lighting, such as in a photo studio.
Fluor.: Warm White:
The color temperature is adjusted for warm white fluorescent lighting.
Fluor.: Cool White:
The color temperature is adjusted for white fluorescent lighting.
Fluor.: Day White:
The color temperature is adjusted for neutral white fluorescent lighting.
Fluor.: Daylight:
The color temperature is adjusted for daylight fluorescent lighting.
Flash:
The color temperature is adjusted for flash light.
C.Temp./Filter:
Adjusts the color tones depending on the light source. Achieves the effect of CC (Color
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Compensation) filters for photography.
Custom 1/Custom 2/Custom 3:
Uses the white balance setting saved in [Custom Setup].
Custom Setup:
Memorizes the basic white color under the light conditions for the shooting environment.
Select a memorized custom white balance number.
Hint
You can use the right side of the control wheel to display the fine adjustment screen and
perform fine adjustments of the color tones as required.
In [C.Temp./Filter], you can use the right button to display the color temperature setting
screen and perform a setting. When you press the right button again, the fine adjustment
screen appears to allow you perform fine adjustments as required.
Note
[White Balance] is fixed to [Auto] in the following situations:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
[105] How to Use Using shooting functions Adjusting color tones
Capturing a basic white color in [Custom Setup] mode
In a scene where the ambient light consists of multiple types of light sources, it is
recommended to use the custom white balance in order to accurately reproduce the
whiteness.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [White Balance] → [Custom Setup].
2. Hold the product so that the white area fully covers the AF area located in the center,
and then press on the center of the control wheel.
The calibrated values (Color Temperature and Color Filter) are displayed.
3. Select a registration number using the right/left button.
The monitor returns to the recording information display while retaining the memorized
custom white balance setting.
Note
The message [Custom WB Error] indicates that the value is higher than the expected
range, when the flash is used on a subject with too bright colors in the frame. If you
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
register this value, the indicator turns orange on the recording information display.
You can shoot at this point, but it is recommended that you set the white balance again to
get a more accurate white balance value.
[106] How to Use Using shooting functions Selecting an effect mode
Picture Effect
Select the desired effect filter to achieve more impressive and artistic images.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Picture Effect] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Off:
Disables the [Picture Effect] function.
Toy Camera:
Creates a soft image with shaded corners and reduced sharpness.
Pop Color:
Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones.
Posterization:
Creates a high contrast, abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors, or in black and
white.
Retro Photo:
Creates the look of an aged photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast.
Soft High-key:
Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere: bright, transparent, ethereal, tender, soft.
Partial Color:
Creates an image which retains a specific color, but converts others to black and white.
High Contrast Mono.:
Creates a high-contrast image in black and white.
Soft Focus:
Creates an image filled with a soft lighting effect.
HDR Painting:
Creates the look of a painting, enhancing the colors and details.
Rich-tone Mono.:
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Creates an image in black and white with rich gradation and reproduction of details.
Miniature:
Creates an image which enhances the subject vividly, with the background defocused
considerably. This effect may often be found in pictures of miniature models.
Watercolor:
Creates an image with ink bleed and blurring effects as if painted using watercolors.
Illustration:
Creates an illustration-like image by emphasizing the outlines.
Hint
You can perform detailed settings for the following [Picture Effect] modes using the
left/right side of the control wheel.
[Toy Camera]
[Posterization]
[Partial Color]
[Soft Focus]
[HDR Painting]
[Miniature]
[Illustration]
Note
When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, setting the zoom scale larger
makes [Toy Camera] less effective.
When [Partial Color] is selected, images may not retain the selected color, depending on
the subject or shooting conditions.
You cannot check the following effects on the shooting screen, because the product
processes the image after the shot. Also, you cannot shoot another image until image
processing is finished. You cannot use these effects with movies.
[Soft Focus]
[HDR Painting]
[Rich-tone Mono.]
[Miniature]
[Watercolor]
[Illustration]
In the case of [HDR Painting] and [Rich-tone Mono.], the shutter is released three times
for one shot. Be careful about the following:
Use this function when the subject is motionless or does not flash light.
Do not change the composition before shooting.
When the contrast of the scene is low or when significant camera-shake or subject blur
has occurred, you may not be able to obtain good HDR images. If the product detects
such a situation, / appear on the recorded image to inform you of this situation. If
necessary, change the composition or otherwise adjust the settings, be careful of blurring,
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
and shoot again.
[Picture Effect] cannot be set when the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto],
[Superior Auto], [Scene Selection] or [Sweep Panorama].
[Picture Effect] cannot be set when [ Quality] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG].
[107] How to Use Using shooting functions Selecting an effect mode
Creative Style
Allows you to select the desired image processing. You can adjust exposure (shutter speed
and aperture) as you like with [Creative Style], unlike with [Scene Selection] where the
product adjusts the exposure.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Creative Style] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Standard:
For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and beautiful colors.
Vivid:
The saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes
and subjects such as flowers, spring greenery, blue sky, or ocean views.
Neutral:
The saturation and sharpness are lowered for shooting images in subdued tones. This is
also suitable for capturing image material to be modified with a computer.
Clear:
For shooting images in clear tones with limpid colors in highlight, suitable for capturing
radiant light.
Deep:
For shooting images with deep and dense colors, suitable for capturing the solid presence of
the subject.
Light:
For shooting images with bright and simple colors, suitable for capturing a refreshingly light
ambience.
Portrait:
For capturing skin in a soft tone, ideally suited for shooting portraits.
Landscape:
The saturation, contrast, and sharpness are heightened for shooting vivid and crisp scenery.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Distant landscapes also stand out more.
Sunset:
For shooting the beautiful red of the setting sun.
Night Scene:
The contrast is lowered for reproducing night scenes.
Autumn leaves:
For shooting autumn scenes, vividly highlighting the reds and yellows of changing leaves.
Black & White:
For shooting images in black and white monotone.
Sepia:
For shooting images in sepia monotone.
Registering preferred settings (Style Box):
Select the six style box (the boxes with numbers on the left side ( )) to register preferred
settings. Then select the desired settings using the right button.
You can call up the same style with slightly different settings.
To set [Contrast], [Saturation] and [Sharpness]
[Contrast], [Saturation] and [Sharpness] can be adjusted for each [Style Box] item.
Select an item to be set by pressing the right/left side of the control wheel, then set the value
using the top/bottom side of the control wheel.
Contrast:
The higher the value selected, the more the difference of light and shadow is accentuated,
and the bigger the effect on the image.
Saturation:
The higher the value selected, the more vivid the color. When a lower value is selected, the
color of the image is restrained and subdued.
Sharpness:
Adjusts the sharpness. The higher the value selected, the more the contours are
accentuated, and the lower the value selected, the more the contours are softened.
Note
[Standard] is selected when using the following functions:
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
[Picture Effect] is set to other than [Off].
[Picture Profile] is set to other than [Off].
When [Creative Style] is set to [Black & White] or [Sepia], [Saturation] cannot be adjusted.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
[108] How to Use Using shooting functions Recording movies
Movie recording formats
The following movie recording formats are available with this camera.
What is XAVC S?
Records high-definition movies such as 4K by converting them to MP4 movies using the
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 codec. MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 is capable of compressing images at
higher efficiency. You can record high-quality images while reducing the amount of data.
XAVC S/AVCHD recording format
XAVC S 4K:
Bit-rate: Approx. 100 Mbps or approx. 60 Mbps
Records movies in 4K resolution (3840×2160).
XAVC S HD:
Bit-rate: Approx. 100 Mbps, Approx. 60 Mbps, or Approx. 50 Mbps
Records a more vivid movie compared to AVCHD with increased amounts of information.
AVCHD:
Bit-rate: Approx. 28 Mbps (Maximum), Approx. 24 Mbps (Maximum) or Approx. 17 Mbps
(Average)
The AVCHD format has a high degree of compatibility with storage devices other than
computers.
Bit rate is the amount of the data processed within a given length of time.
[109] How to Use Using shooting functions Recording movies
File Format (movie)
Selects the movie file format.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [File Format] → desired setting.
Menu item details
XAVC S 4K:
Records high-definition movies in XAVC S 4K. This format supports a higher bit rate.
Audio: LPCM
In order to record movies with [File Format] set to [XAVC S 4K], the following kind of
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
memory card is needed:
SDXC memory card with a capacity of 64 GB or more (SD Speed Class 10 ( ))
UHS-I -compatible SDXC memory card with a capacity of 64 GB or more (UHS Speed Class 1 (
) or faster)
When recording in 100 Mbps or more, an SDXC memory card with a capacity of 64 GB or more
(UHS Speed Class 3 ( ))
[HDMI Info. Display] is temporarily set to [Off] when [File Format] is set to [XAVC S
4K].
Images will not appear on the monitor when you record movies while the camera is
connected to an HDMI device with [File Format] set to [XAVC S 4K].
[Smile/Face Detect.] and [Center Lock-on AF] are temporarily set to [Off] when the
camera is connected to an HDMI device with [File Format] set to [XAVC S 4K].
[Smile/Face Detect.], [Center Lock-on AF] and [REC Control] are temporarily set to
[Off] when [File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] and [Dual Video REC] is set to [On].
Even if the camera is connected to an HDMI device, images will not be displayed on that
device while movie recording is in progress.
XAVC S HD:
Records high-definition movies in XAVC S HD. This format supports a higher bit rate.
Audio: LPCM
In order to record movies with [File Format] set to [XAVC S HD], the following kind of
memory card is needed:
SDXC memory card with a capacity of 64 GB or more (SD Speed Class 10 ( ))
UHS-I compatible SDXC memory card with a capacity of 64 GB or more (UHS Speed Class 1 (
) or faster)
When recording in 100 Mbps or more, an SDXC memory card with a capacity of 64 GB or more
(UHS Speed Class 3 ( ))
AVCHD:
Records HD movies in AVCHD format. This file format is suitable for high-definition TV.
Audio: Dolby Digital
MP4:
Records mp4 (AVC) movies. This format is suitable for playback on smartphones or tablets,
web uploads, email attachments, etc.
Audio: AAC
Hint
You can save images on a computer or copy them to a compatible medium using the
software PlayMemories Home.
Note
When [ File Format] is set to [AVCHD], the file size of movies is limited to approx. 2
GB. If the movie file size reaches approx. 2 GB during recording, a new movie file will be
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
created automatically.
When [ File Format] is set to [MP4], the file size of movies is limited to approx. 4 GB. If
the movie file size reaches approx. 4 GB during recording, recording will stop
automatically.
[110] How to Use Using shooting functions Recording movies
Record Setting (movie)
Selects the image size, frame rate, and image quality for movie recording. The higher the bit-
rate, the higher the image quality.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Record Setting] → desired setting.
When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K]
Records high-definition movies by converting them to MP4 file format using the MPEG-4
AVC/H.264 codec.
When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD]
Records high-definition movies by converting them to MP4 file format using the MPEG-4
AVC/H.264 codec.
When [ File Format] is set to [AVCHD]
60i/50i: Movies are recorded at approximately 60 fields/sec (for 1080 60i-compatible
devices) or 50 fields/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices), in interlaced mode, with Dolby
Digital audio, in AVCHD format.
24p/25p: Movies are recorded at approximately 24 frames/sec (for 1080 60i-compatible
devices) or 25 frames/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices), in progressive mode, with
Dolby Digital audio, in AVCHD format.
60p/50p: Movies are recorded at approximately 60 frames/sec (for 1080 60i-compatible
devices) or 50 frames/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices), in progressive mode, with
Dolby Digital audio, in AVCHD format.
When [ File Format] is set to [MP4]
Movies shot are recorded in MPEG-4 format, at approximately 60 frames/sec (for 1080 60i-
compatible devices), approximately 50 frames/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices),
approximately 30 frames/sec (for 1080 60i-compatible devices) or approximately 25
frames/sec (for 1080 50i-compatible devices), in progressive mode, with AAC audio, MP4
format.
Menu item details
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K]
30p 100M/25p 100M:
Records the movies in 3840 × 2160 (30p/25p).
Bit-rate: Approx. 100 Mbps
30p 60M/25p 60M:
Records the movies in 3840 × 2160 (30p/25p).
Bit-rate: Approx. 60 Mbps
24p 100M*:
Records the movies in 3840 × 2160 (24p). This produces a cinema-like atmosphere.
Bit-rate: Approx. 100 Mbps
24p 60M*:
Records the movies in 3840 × 2160 (24p). This produces a cinema-like atmosphere.
Bit-rate: Approx. 60 Mbps
When [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD]
60p 50M/50p 50M:
Records the movies in 1920 × 1080 (60p/50p).
Bit-rate: Approx. 50 Mbps
30p 50M/25p 50M:
Records the movies in 1920 × 1080 (30p/25p).
Bit-rate: Approx. 50 Mbps
24p 50M*:
Records the movies in 1920 × 1080 (24p). This produces a cinema-like atmosphere.
Bit-rate: Approx. 50 Mbps
120p 100M/100p 100M:
Records 1920 × 1080 (120p/100p) size movies at a high speed. Movies can be recorded at
120 fps/100 fps.
You can create smoother slow-motion images using compatible editing equipment.
Bit-rate: Approx. 100 Mbps
120p 60M/100p 60M:
Records 1920 × 1080 (120p/100p) size movies at a high speed. Movies can be recorded at
120 fps/100 fps.
You can create smoother slow-motion images using compatible editing equipment.
Bit-rate: Approx. 60 Mbps
When [ File Format] is set to [AVCHD]
60i 24M(FX)/50i 24M(FX):
Records the movies in 1920 × 1080 (60i/50i).
Bit-rate: 24 Mbps (Max.)
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
60i 17M(FH)/50i 17M(FH):
Records the movies in 1920 × 1080 (60i/50i).
Bit-rate: Approx. 17 Mbps (Avg.)
60p 28M(PS)/50p 28M(PS):
Records the movies in 1920 × 1080 (60p/50p).
Bit-rate: 28 Mbps (Max.)
24p 24M(FX)/25p 24M(FX):
Records the movies in 1920 × 1080 (24p/25p). This produces a cinema-like atmosphere.
Bit-rate: 24 Mbps (Max.)
24p 17M(FH)/25p 17M(FH):
Records the movies in 1920 × 1080 (24p/25p). This produces a cinema-like atmosphere.
Bit-rate: Approx. 17 Mbps (Avg.)
When [ File Format] is set to [MP4]
1920x1080 60p 28M/1920x1080 50p 28M:
Records the movies in 1920×1080 (60p/50p).
Bit-rate: Approx. 28 Mbps (Avg.)
1920x1080 30p 16M/1920x1080 25p 16M:
Records the movies in 1920×1080 (30p/25p).
Bit-rate: Approx. 16 Mbps (Avg.)
1280x720 30p 6M/1280x720 25p 6M:
Records small file size movies in 1280×720 (30p/25p).
Bit-rate: Approx. 6 Mbps (Avg.)
* Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.
Note
60p/50p movies can be played back only on compatible devices.
Movies recorded with the [60p 28M(PS)]/[50p 28M(PS)]/[60i 24M(FX)]/[50i 24M(FX)]/
[24p 24M(FX)] /[25p 24M(FX)] setting in [Record Setting] are converted by
PlayMemories Home in order to create an AVCHD recording disc. This conversion can
take a long time. Also, you cannot create a disc in the original image quality. If you want to
keep the original image quality, store your movies on a Blu-ray Disc.
To play back 60p/50p/24p/25p movies on a TV, the TV must be compatible with the
60p/50p/24p/25p formats. If the TV is not compatible with the 60p/50p/24p/25p format,
60p/50p/24p/25p movies will be output as 60i/50i movies.
[120p]/[100p] cannot be selected for the following settings.
[Intelligent Auto]
[Superior Auto]
[Scene Selection]
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
[111] How to Use Using shooting functions Recording movies
Dual Video REC
Allows you to simultaneously record an XAVC S movie and an MP4 movie, or an AVCHD
movie and an MP4 movie.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Dual Video REC] → desired setting.
Menu item details
On:
An XAVC S movie and an MP4 movie, or an AVCHD movie and an MP4 movie, are
recorded simultaneously.
Off:
The [Dual Video REC] function is not used.
Note
When [ Record Setting] for an XAVC S movie is set to [60p]/[50p] or [120p]/[100p], [
Record Setting] for an AVCHD movie is set to [60p]/[50p], or [File Format] is set
to [MP4], the [Dual Video REC] function is set to [Off].
If you select [Date View] in [View Mode] when playing back movies, XAVC S movies and
MP4 movies, or AVCHD movies and MP4 movies are displayed side-by-side.
When setting [ SteadyShot] to [Intelligent Active], [Dual Video REC] is set to [Off].
[112] How to Use Using shooting functions Recording movies
Capturing still images while recording movies (Dual Rec)
You can capture still images while recording movies without stopping recording. Use Dual
Rec when you want to record both movies and still images at the same time.
1. Press the MOVIE button to start recording the movie.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
2. Press the shutter button to capture a still image.
If you press the shutter button halfway down, the remaining number of still images
you can shoot will be displayed on the screen.
While shooting still images, the message [CAPTURE] is displayed on the screen.
3. Press the MOVIE button again to finish recording the movie.
Hint
The image size or image quality of the still images can be selected from MENU →
(Camera Settings)→[Img. Size(Dual Rec)]/[Quality(Dual Rec)].
Note
Dual Rec may be unavailable depending on the recording setting or mode setting.
Depending on the memory card you use, it may take a while to record a still image.
The shutter button sound may be recorded.
You cannot use the flash while using Dual Rec.
[113] How to Use Using shooting functions Recording movies
Auto Dual Rec
Sets whether or not to automatically shoot still images when shooting movies. Shoots when
impressive compositions, including people, are detected. This function may also record
versions of the automatically shot images that have been trimmed into optimal compositions.
When a trimmed image is recorded, both the image before trimming and the trimmed image
will be recorded.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Auto Dual Rec] → desired setting.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
2. Press the MOVIE button to start movie recording.
Still images will be shot automatically. While capturing a still image, the message
[CAPTURE] is displayed on the monitor.
3. Press the MOVIE button again to finish movie recording.
To view the movies and still images recorded, press the (Playback) button.
Menu item details
Off:
Auto Dual Rec is not performed.
On: Shoot. Frequency Low/On: Shoot. Frequency Standard/On: Shoot. Frequency
High:
Auto Dual Rec is performed with the specified shooting frequency.
The positions, orientation, expressions of faces are detected in order to shoot still images
with the impressive compositions.
Hint
If you want to change the size or quality of still images, use MENU → (Camera
Settings)→[Img. Size(Dual Rec)]/[Quality(Dual Rec)].
Even when [Auto Dual Rec] is set to On, you can record still images by pressing the
shutter button.
Note
Depending on the recording conditions, still images may not be shot with the optimal
timing.
[114] How to Use Using shooting functions Recording movies
Img. Size(Dual Rec)
Selects the size of still images to be shot while recording movies.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Img. Size(Dual Rec)] → desired setting.
Menu item details
L: 17M/M: 7.5M/S: 4.2M
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
[115] How to Use Using shooting functions Recording movies
Quality(Dual Rec)
Selects the quality of still images to be shot while recording movies.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Quality(Dual Rec)] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Extra fine/Fine/Standard
[116] How to Use Using shooting functions Recording movies
Marker Display (movie)
Sets whether or not to display markers set using [Marker Settings] on the monitor while
shooting movies.
1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [Marker Display] → desired setting.
Menu item details
On:
Markers are displayed. The markers are not recorded.
Off:
No marker is displayed.
Note
The markers are displayed when the mode dial is set to (Movie) or when shooting
movies.
You cannot display markers when using [Focus Magnifier].
The markers are displayed on the monitor or viewfinder. (You cannot output the markers.)
[117] How to Use Using shooting functions Recording movies
Marker Settings (movie)
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Sets the markers to be displayed while shooting movies.
1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [Marker Settings] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Center:
Sets whether or not to display the center marker in the center of the shooting screen.
Off / On
Aspect:
Sets the aspect marker display.
Off / 4:3 / 13:9 / 14:9 / 15:9 / 1.66:1 / 1.85:1 / 2.35:1
Safety Zone:
Sets the safety zone display. This becomes the standard range that can be received by a
general household TV.
Off / 80% / 90%
Guideframe:
Sets whether or not to display the guide frame. You can verify whether the subject is level or
perpendicular to the ground.
Off / On
Hint
You can display all the markers at the same time.
Place the subject on the cross point of the [Guideframe] to make a balanced composition.
[118] How to Use Using shooting functions Recording movies
SteadyShot (movie)
Sets [ SteadyShot] effect when shooting movies. If you set the [ SteadyShot] effect
to [Off] when using a tripod (sold separately), a natural image is produced.
1. MENU→ (Camera Settings) → [ SteadyShot] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Intelligent Active:
Provides the most powerful SteadyShot effect.
Active:
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Provides a more powerful SteadyShot effect.
Standard:
Reduces camera shake under stable movie shooting conditions.
Off:
Does not use [ SteadyShot].
Note
If you change the setting for [ SteadyShot], the angle of view will change.
[Intelligent Active] and [Active] cannot be selected when [File Format] is set to [XAVC
S 4K].
[119] How to Use Using shooting functions Recording movies
Audio Recording
Sets whether to record sounds when shooting movies.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Audio Recording] → desired setting.
Menu item details
On:
Records sound (stereo).
Off:
Does not record sound.
Note
The noise of the lens and the product in operation will also be recorded, when [On] is
selected.
[120] How to Use Using shooting functions Recording movies
Audio Level Display
Sets whether to display the audio level on the screen.
1. MENU→(Custom Settings) → [Audio Level Display] → desired setting.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Menu item details
On:
Displays the audio level.
Off:
Does not display the audio level.
Note
The audio level is not displayed in the following situations:
When [Audio Recording] is set to [Off].
When DISP (Display Setting) is set to [No Disp. Info.].
Set the shooting mode to Movie. You can see the audio level before recording only in
movie recording mode.
[121] How to Use Using shooting functions Recording movies
Audio Rec Level
You can adjust the audio recording level while checking the level meter.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Audio Rec Level] → desired setting.
Menu item details
+:
Turns up the audio recording level.
−:
Turns down the audio recording level.
Reset:
Resets the audio recording level to the default setting.
Hint
When you record audio movies with loud volumes, set [Audio Rec Level] to a lower sound
level. Doing so enables you to record more realistic audio. When you record audio movies
with lower volumes, set [Audio Rec Level] to a greater sound level to make the sound
easier to hear.
Note
Regardless of the [Audio Rec Level] settings, the limiter always operates.
[Audio Rec Level] is available only when the shooting mode is set to Movie.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
The [Audio Rec Level] settings are applied for both the internal microphone and the
(Microphone) terminal input.
[122] How to Use Using shooting functions Recording movies
Audio Out Timing
You can set echo cancellation during audio monitoring and prevent undesirable deviations
between video and audio during HDMI output.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Audio Out Timing] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Live:
Outputs audio without delay. Select this setting when audio deviation is a problem during
audio monitoring.
Lip Sync:
Outputs audio and video in sync. Select this setting to prevent undesirable deviations
between video and audio.
[123] How to Use Using shooting functions Recording movies
Wind Noise Reduct.
Sets whether or not to reduce wind noise during movie recording.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Wind Noise Reduct.] → desired setting.
Menu item details
On:
Reduces wind noise.
Off:
Does not reduce wind noise.
Note
Setting this item to [On] where wind is not blowing sufficiently hard may cause normal
sound to be recorded with too low volume.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
When an external microphone (sold separately) is used, [Wind Noise Reduct.] does not
function.
[124] How to Use Using shooting functions Recording movies
Auto Slow Shut. (movie)
Sets whether or not to adjust the shutter speed automatically when recording movies if the
subject is dark.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Auto Slow Shut.] → desired setting.
Menu item details
On:
Uses [ Auto Slow Shut.]. The shutter speed automatically slows when recording in dark
locations. You can reduce noise in the movie by using a slow shutter speed when recording
in dark locations.
Off:
Does not use [Auto Slow Shut.]. The recorded movie will be darker than when [On] is
selected, but you can record movies with smoother motion and less object blur.
Note
[Auto Slow Shut.] does not function in the following situations:
( Shutter Priority)
(Manual Exposure)
[125] How to Use Using shooting functions Recording movies
MOVIE Button
Sets whether or not to activate the MOVIE button.
1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [MOVIE Button] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Always:
Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button in any mode.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
(except when the mode dial is set to (High Frame Rate).)
Movie Mode Only:
Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button only if the shooting mode is set to
[Movie] mode.
[126] How to Use Using shooting functions Recording movies
Picture Profile
Allows you to change the settings for the color, gradation, etc.
For details on “Picture Profile,” refer to http://helpguide.sony.net/di/pp/v1/en/index.html.
Customizing the picture profile
You can customize the picture quality by adjusting picture profile items such as [Gamma]
and [Detail]. When setting these parameters, connect the camera to a TV or monitor, and
adjust them while observing the picture on the screen.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Picture Profile] → the profile you want to change.
2. Move to the item index screen by pressing the right side of the control wheel.
3. Select the item to change using the up/down sides of the control wheel.
4. Select the desired value using the up/down sides of the control wheel and press in
the center.
Using the preset of the picture profile
The default settings [PP1] through [PP7] for movies have been set in advance in the camera
based on various shooting conditions.
MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Picture Profile] → desired setting.
PP1:
Example setting using [Movie] gamma
PP2:
Example setting using [Still] gamma
PP3:
Example setting of natural color tone using the [ITU709] gamma
PP4:
Example setting of a color tone faithful to the ITU709 standard
PP5:
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Example setting using [Cine1] gamma
PP6:
Example setting using [Cine2] gamma
PP7:
Example setting using [S-Log2] gamma
Items of the picture profile
Black Level
Sets the black level. (–15 to +15)
Gamma
Selects a gamma curve.
Movie: Standard gamma curve for movies
Still: Standard gamma curve for still images
Cine1: Softens the contrast in dark parts and emphasizes gradation in bright parts to
produce a relaxed color movie. (equivalent to HG4609G33)
Cine2: Similar to [Cine1] but optimized for editing with up to 100% video signal. (equivalent
to HG4600G30)
ITU709: Gamma curve that corresponds to ITU709.
ITU709(800%): Gamma curve for confirming scenes on the assumption of shooting using [S-
Log2].
S-Log2: Gamma curve for [S-Log2]. This setting is based on the assumption that the picture
will be processed after shooting.
Black Gamma
Corrects gamma in low intensity areas.
Range: Selects the correcting range. (Wide / Middle / Narrow)
Level: Sets the correcting level. (-7 (maximum black compression) to +7 (maximum black
stretch))
Knee
Sets knee point and slope for video signal compression to prevent over-exposure by limiting
signals in high intensity areas of the subject to the dynamic range of your camera.
When selecting [Still], [Cine1], [Cine2], [ITU709(800%)], [S-Log2] in [Gamma], [Knee] is set
to [Off] if [Mode] is set to [Auto]. To use functions in [Knee], set [Mode] to [Manual].
Mode: Selects auto/manual settings.
Auto: The knee point and slope are set automatically.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Manual: The knee point and slope are set manually.
Auto Set: Settings when [Auto] is selected for [Mode].
Max Point: Sets the maximum point of the knee point. (90% to 100%)
Sensitivity: Sets the sensitivity. (High/Mid/Low)
Manual Set: Settings when [Manual] is selected for [Mode].
Point: Sets the knee point. (75% to 105%)
Slope: Sets the knee slope. (-5 (gentle) to +5 (steep))
Color Mode
Sets type and level of colors.
Movie: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Movie].
Still: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Still].
Cinema: Suitable colors when [Gamma] is set to [Cine1].
Pro: Similar color tones to the standard image quality of Sony professional cameras (when
combined with ITU709 gamma)
ITU709 Matrix: Colors corresponding to ITU709 standard (when combined with ITU709
gamma)
Black & White: Sets the saturation to zero for shooting in black and white.
S-Gamut: Setting based on the assumption that the pictures will be processed after
shooting. Used when [Gamma] is set to [S-Log2].
Saturation
Sets the color saturation. (-32 to +32)
Color Phase
Sets the color phase. (-7 to +7)
Color Depth
Sets the color depth for each color phase. This function is more effective for chromatic
colors and less effective for achromatic colors. The color looks deeper as you increase the
setting value towards the positive side, and lighter as you decrease the value towards the
negative side. This function is effective even if you set [Color Mode] to [Black & White].
[R] -7 (light red) to +7 (deep red)
[G] -7 (light green) to +7 (deep green)
[B] -7 (light blue) to +7 (deep blue)
[C] -7 (light cyan) to +7 (deep cyan)
[M] -7 (light magenta) to +7 (deep magenta)
[Y] -7 (light yellow) to +7 (deep yellow)
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Detail
Sets items for [Detail].
Level: Sets the [Detail] level. (-7 to +7)
Adjust: The following parameters can be selected manually.
Mode: Selects auto/manual setting. (Auto (automatic optimization) / Manual (The details
are set manually.))
V/H Balance: Sets the vertical (V) and horizontal (H) balance of DETAIL. (-2 (off to the
vertical (V) side) to +2 (off to the horizontal (H) side))
B/W Balance: Selects the balance of the lower DETAIL (B) and the upper DETAIL (W).
(Type1 (off to the lower DETAIL (B) side) to Type5 (off to the upper DETAIL (W) side))
Limit: Sets the limit level of [Detail]. (0 (Low limit level: likely to be limited) to 7 (High limit
level: unlikely to be limited))
Crispning: Sets the crispening level. (0 (shallow crispening level) to 7 (deep crispening
level))
Hi-Light Detail: Sets the [Detail] level in the high intensity areas. (0 to 4)
Copy
Copies the settings of the picture profile to another picture profile number.
MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Picture Profile] → [Copy]
Reset
Resets the picture profile to the default setting. You cannot reset all picture profile settings at
once.
MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Picture Profile] → [Reset]
Note
Since the parameters are shared for movie and still images, adjust the value when you
change the shooting mode.
If you print RAW images with shooting settings, the following settings are not reflected.
Black Level
Black Gamma
Knee
Color Depth
When the [Record Setting] is [120p 100M]/[100p 100M] or [120p 60M]/[100p 60M],
[Black Gamma] is fixed at “0” and cannot be adjusted.
If you change [Gamma], the available ISO value range changes.
When using S-Log2 gamma, the noise becomes more noticeable compared to when
using other gammas. If the noise still is significant even after processing pictures, it may
be improved by shooting with a brighter setting. However, the dynamic range becomes
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
narrower accordingly when you shoot with a brighter setting. We recommend checking
the picture in advance by test shooting when using S-Log2.
Setting [ITU709(800%)] or [S-Log2] may cause an error in the white balance custom
setup. In that case, set the exposure bright first and then perform custom setup.
Setting [ITU709(800%)] or [S-Log2] disables the [Black Level] setting.
If you set [Slope] to +5 in [Manual Set], [Knee] is set to [Off].
S-Gamut is a color space unique to Sony that provides a wide color space equivalent to
film cameras. However, S-Gamut setting of this camera does not support the whole color
space of S-Gamut; it is a setting to realize a color reproduction equivalent to S-Gamut.
[127] How to Use Using shooting functions Recording movies
High Frame Rate
You can select the exposure mode for HFR shooting based on the subject and effect you
want.
1. MENU→ (Camera Settings) → [High Frame Rate] → desired settings.
Menu item details
Program Auto/ Aperture Priority/ Shutter Priority/ Manual Exposure
[128] How to Use Using shooting functions Customizing the shooting functions for
convenient use
Memory
Allows you to register up to 3 often-used modes or product settings in the product. You can
recall the settings using just the mode dial.
1. Set the product to the setting you want to register.
2. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Memory] → desired number.
Items that can be registered
Shooting mode
Shutter speed
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Camera Settings
Optical zoom scale
To recall registered settings
Set the mode dial to MR, then press the right/left side of the control wheel or turn the control
wheel to select the desired memory number.
To change registered settings
Change the setting to the desired one and re-register the setting to the same mode number.
Note
Program Shift cannot be registered.
For some functions, the position of the dial and the setting actually used for shooting may
not match. If this happens, shoot images by referring to the information displayed on the
monitor.
[129] How to Use Using shooting functions Customizing the shooting functions for
convenient use
Function Menu Set.
You can assign the functions to be called up when you press the Fn (Function) button.
1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [Function Menu Set.] → set a function to the
desired location.
The functions that can be assigned are displayed on the setup item selection screen.
[130] How to Use Using shooting functions Customizing the shooting functions for
convenient use
Custom Key Settings
Assigning functions to the various keys allows you to speed up operations by pressing the
appropriate key when the shooting information screen or playback screen is displayed to
execute an assigned function.
1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [Custom Key Settings] → set a function to the
desired key.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Examples of functions that can only be assigned with custom keys
Standard:
Depending on the options selected in [Focus Area] or [Center Lock-on AF], the available
functions varies when pressing the key.
When you press the key when the [Focus Area] is set to [Flexible Spot] or [Expand
Flexible Spot], you can change the focus area position.
When you press the key when the [Focus Area] is set to [Wide] or [Center] and [Center
Lock-on AF] is [On], [Center Lock-on AF] will activate.
Note
Some functions cannot be assigned to certain keys.
[131] How to Use Using shooting functions Customizing the shooting functions for
convenient use
Function of the control wheel
Once you assign a function to the control wheel, you can perform that function by simply
turning the wheel when the shooting information screen is displayed.
1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [Custom Key Settings] → [Control Wheel] →
desired setting.
The functions that can be assigned are displayed on the setup item selection screen.
[132] How to Use Using shooting functions Customizing the shooting functions for
convenient use
Function of the AEL button
Once you assign a function to the AEL button, you can perform that function by simply
pressing the AEL button when the shooting information screen is displayed.
1. MENU→ (Custom Settings) → [Custom Key Settings] → [AEL Button] → desired
setting.
The functions that can be assigned are displayed on the setup item selection screen.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
[133] How to Use Using shooting functions Customizing the shooting functions for
convenient use
Function of the Custom button
Once you assign a function to the Custom button, you can perform that function by simply
pressing the Custom button when the shooting information screen is displayed.
1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [Custom Key Settings] → [Custom Button] →
desired setting.
The functions that can be assigned are displayed on the setup item selection screen.
[134] How to Use Using shooting functions Customizing the shooting functions for
convenient use
Function of the Center button
Once you assign a function to the center button, you can perform that function by simply
pressing the center button when the shooting information screen is displayed.
1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [Custom Key Settings] → [Center Button] → desired
setting.
The functions that can be assigned are displayed on the setup item selection screen.
[135] How to Use Using shooting functions Customizing the shooting functions for
convenient use
Function of the Left button
Once you assign a function to the left button, you can perform that function by simply
pressing the left button when the shooting information screen is displayed.
1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [Custom Key Settings] → [Left Button] → desired
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
setting.
The functions that can be assigned are displayed on the setup item selection screen.
[136] How to Use Using shooting functions Customizing the shooting functions for
convenient use
Function of the Right button
Once you assign a function to the right button, you can perform that function by simply
pressing the right button when the shooting information screen is displayed.
1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [Custom Key Settings] → [Right Button] → desired
setting.
The functions that can be assigned are displayed on the setup item selection screen.
[137] How to Use Using shooting functions Customizing the shooting functions for
convenient use
Function of the down button
Once you assign a function to the down button, you can perform that function by simply
pressing the down button when the shooting information screen is displayed.
1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [Custom Key Settings] → [Down Button] → desired
setting.
The functions that can be assigned are displayed on the setup item selection screen.
[138] How to Use Using shooting functions Setting the other functions of this product
Smile/Face Detect.
Detects the faces of your subjects and adjusts the focus, exposure, flash settings and
performs image processing automatically.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Smile/Face Detect.] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Off:
Does not use the Face Detection function.
On (Regist. Faces):
Detects the registered face with higher priority using [Face Registration].
On:
Detects a face without giving higher priority to the registered face.
Smile Shutter:
Automatically detects and shoots a smile.
Face Detection frame
When the product detects a face, the gray face detection frame appears. When the
product determines that autofocus is enabled, the face detection frame turns white. When
you press the shutter button halfway down, the frame turns green.
In case you have registered the priority order for each face using [Face Registration], the
product automatically selects the first prioritized face and the face detection frame over
that face turns white. The face detection frames of other registered faces turn reddish-
purple.
Tips for capturing smiles more effectively
Do not cover the eyes with front hair and keep the eyes narrowed.
Do not obscure the face by a hat, masks, sunglasses, etc.
Try to orient the face in front of the product and be as level as possible.
Give a clear smile with an open mouth. The smile is easier to be detected when the teeth
are shown.
If you press the shutter button during Smile Shutter, the product shoots the image. After
shooting, the product returns to Smile Shutter mode.
Hint
When the [Smile/Face Detect.] is set to [Smile Shutter], you can select the Smile
Detection Sensitivity from [On: Slight Smile], [On: Normal Smile] and [On: Big Smile].
Note
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
You cannot use the Face Detection function with the following functions:
Zoom functions other than the optical zoom
[Sweep Panorama]
[Picture Effect] is set to [Posterization].
When using the [Focus Magnifier] function.
[Scene Selection] is set to [Landscape], [Night Scene] or [Sunset].
[Record Setting] is set to [120p]/[100p].
Up to eight faces of your subjects can be detected.
The product may not detect faces at all or may accidentally detect other objects as faces
in some conditions.
If the product cannot detect a face, set the Smile Detection Sensitivity.
If you track a face using [Lock-on AF] while executing Smile Shutter function, Smile
Detection is performed only for that face.
[139] How to Use Using shooting functions Setting the other functions of this product
Soft Skin Effect (still image)
Sets the effect used for shooting the skin smoothly in the Face Detection function.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [ Soft Skin Effect] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Off:
Does not use the [Soft Skin Effect] function.
On:
Uses the [Soft Skin Effect].
Hint
When [ Soft Skin Effect] is set to [On], you can select the effect level. Select the effect
level by pressing the right/left side of the control wheel.
Note
[Soft Skin Effect] is not available when [ Quality] is [RAW].
[140] How to Use Using shooting functions Setting the other functions of this product
Face Registration (New Registration)
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
If you register faces in advance, the product can detect the registered face as a priority when
[Smile/Face Detect.] is set to [On (Regist. Faces)].
1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [Face Registration] → [New Registration].
2. Align the guide frame with the face to be registered, and press the shutter button.
3. When a confirmation message appears, select [Enter].
Note
Up to eight faces can be registered.
Shoot the face from the front in a brightly lit place. The face may not be registered
correctly if it is obscured by a hat, a mask, sunglasses, etc.
[141] How to Use Using shooting functions Setting the other functions of this product
Face Registration (Order Exchanging)
When multiple faces are registered to be given priority, the face registered first will be given
priority. You can change the priority order.
1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [Face Registration] → [Order Exchanging].
2. Select a face to change the order of priority.
3. Select the destination.
[142] How to Use Using shooting functions Setting the other functions of this product
Face Registration (Delete)
Deletes a registered face.
1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [Face Registration] → [Delete].
If you select [Delete All], you can delete all registered faces.
Note
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Even if you execute [Delete], the data for registered face will remain in the product. To
delete the data for registered faces from the product, select [Delete All].
[143] How to Use Using shooting functions Setting the other functions of this product
Red Eye Reduction
When using the flash, it is fired two or more times before shooting to reduce the red-eye
phenomenon.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Red Eye Reduction] → desired setting.
Menu item details
On:
The flash is always fired to reduce the red-eye phenomenon.
Off:
Does not use Red Eye Reduction.
Note
Red Eye Reduction may not produce the desired effects. It depends on individual
differences and conditions, such as distance to the subject, or whether the subject looks
at the pre-strobe or not.
[144] How to Use Using shooting functions Setting the other functions of this product
Auto Obj. Framing (still image)
When this product detects and shoots faces, macro shooting subjects or subjects that are
tracked by [Lock-on AF], the product automatically trims the image into an appropriate
composition, and then saves it. Both the original and the trimmed images are saved. The
trimmed image is recorded in the same size as the original image size.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [ Auto Obj. Framing] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Off:
Does not trim images.
Auto:
Automatically trims images into an appropriate composition.
Note
The trimmed image may not be the best possible composition, depending on the shooting
conditions.
[Auto Obj. Framing] cannot be set when using zoom functions other than the optical
zoom.
[Auto Obj. Framing] cannot be set when [ Quality] is set to [RAW] or [RAW &
JPEG].
[145] How to Use Using shooting functions Setting the other functions of this product
SteadyShot (still image)
Sets whether or not to use the SteadyShot function.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [ SteadyShot] → desired setting.
Menu item details
On:
Uses [ SteadyShot].
Off:
Does not use [ SteadyShot].
We recommend that you set the camera to [Off] when using a tripod.
[146] How to Use Using shooting functions Setting the other functions of this product
Long Exposure NR (still image)
When you set the shutter speed to 1/3 second(s) or longer (long exposure shooting), noise
reduction is turned on for the duration that the shutter is open. With the function turned on,
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
the grainy noise typical of long exposures is reduced.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [Long Exposure NR] → desired setting.
Menu item details
On:
Activates noise reduction for the same duration that the shutter is open. When noise
reduction is in progress, a message appears and you cannot take another picture. Select this
to prioritize the image quality.
Off:
Does not activate noise reduction. Select this to prioritize the timing of shooting.
Note
Noise reduction may not be activated even if [Long Exposure NR] is set to [On] in the
following situations:
The shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama].
[Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting], [Spd Priority Cont.] or [Cont. Bracket].
The shooting mode is set to [Scene Selection] and [Sports Action], [Hand-held Twilight] or [Anti
Motion Blur] is selected.
The ISO sensitivity is set to [Multi Frame NR].
You cannot set [Long Exposure NR] to [Off] when the shooting mode is set to
[Intelligent Auto], [Superior Auto] or [Scene Selection].
Depending on the shooting conditions, the camera may not perform noise reduction, even
if the shutter speed is longer than 1/3 second(s).
[147] How to Use Using shooting functions Setting the other functions of this product
High ISO NR (still image)
When shooting with high ISO sensitivity, the product reduces noise that becomes more
noticeable when the product sensitivity is high. A message may be displayed during noise
reduction processing; you cannot shoot another image until the message disappears.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [High ISO NR] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Normal:
Activates high ISO noise reduction normally.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Low:
Activates high ISO noise reduction moderately.
Off:
Does not activate high ISO noise reduction. Select this to prioritize the timing of shooting.
Note
[High ISO NR] is not available in the following situations:
When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], [Superior Auto], [Scene Selection] or [Sweep
Panorama].
[High ISO NR] is not available for RAW images.
[148] How to Use Using shooting functions Setting the other functions of this product
Write Date (still image)
Sets whether to record a shooting date on the still image.
1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [ Write Date] → desired setting.
Menu item details
On:
Records a shooting date.
Off:
Does not record a shooting date.
Note
If you shoot images with the date once, you cannot delete the date from the images later.
The dates are doubly printed if you set the product to print dates when printing the
images using PCs or printers.
The recorded time of the image cannot be superimposed on the image.
[Write Date] is not available for RAW images.
[149] How to Use Using shooting functions Setting the other functions of this product
Color Space (still image)
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
The way colors are represented using combinations of numbers or the range of color
reproduction is called “color space.” You can change the color space depending on the
purpose of the image.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [ Color Space] → desired setting.
Menu item details
sRGB:
This is the standard color space of the digital camera. Use [sRGB] in normal shooting, such
as when you intend to print out the images without any modification.
AdobeRGB:
This color space has a wide range of color reproduction. When a large part of the subject is
vivid green or red, Adobe RGB is effective. The file name of the image starts with “_DSC.”
Note
[AdobeRGB] is for applications or printers that support color management and DCF2.0
option color space. Images may not be printed or viewed in the correct colors if you use
applications or printers that do not support Adobe RGB.
When displaying images that were recorded with [AdobeRGB] on non-Adobe RGB-
compliant devices, the images will be displayed with low saturation.
[150] How to Use Using shooting functions Setting the other functions of this product
Grid Line
Sets whether the grid line is displayed or not. The grid line will help you to adjust the
composition of images.
1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [Grid Line] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Rule of 3rds Grid:
Place main subjects close to one of the grid lines that divide the image into thirds for a well-
balanced composition.
Square Grid:
Square grids make it easier to confirm the horizontal level of your composition. This is
suitable to determine the quality of the composition when shooting landscape, close-up, or
duplicated images.
Diag. + Square Grid:
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Place a subject on the diagonal line to express an uplifting and powerful feeling.
Off:
Does not display the grid line.
[151] How to Use Using shooting functions Setting the other functions of this product
Auto Review
You can check the recorded image on the screen right after the shooting. You can also set
the display time for Auto Review.
1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [Auto Review] → desired setting.
Menu item details
10 Sec/5 Sec/2 Sec:
Displays the recorded image on the screen right after shooting for the selected duration of
time. If you perform a magnifying operation during Auto Review, you can check that image
using the magnified scale.
Off:
Does not display the Auto Review.
Note
When the product is enlarging an image using image processing, it may temporarily
display the original image prior to enlarging and then display the enlarged image.
The DISP (Display Setting) settings are applied for the Auto Review display.
[152] How to Use Using shooting functions Setting the other functions of this product
Live View Display
Sets whether or not to show images altered with effects of the exposure compensation,
white balance, [Creative Style], or [Picture Effect] on the screen.
1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [Live View Display] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Setting Effect ON:
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Displays Live View in conditions close to what your picture will look like as a result of
applying all your settings. This setting is useful when you want to shoot pictures while
checking the results of the shot on the Live View screen.
Setting Effect OFF:
Displays Live View without the effects of exposure compensation, white balance, [Creative
Style], or [Picture Effect]. When this setting is used, you can easily check the image
composition.
Live View is always displayed with the appropriate brightness even in [Manual Exposure]
mode.
When [Setting Effect OFF] is selected, the icon is displayed on the Live View screen.
Note
When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], [Superior Auto], [Sweep Panorama],
[Movie] or [Scene Selection], [Live View Display] cannot be set to [Setting Effect OFF].
When [Live View Display] is set to [Setting Effect OFF], the brightness of the shot image
will not be the same as that of the displayed Live View.
Hint
When you use a third-party flash, such as a studio flash, Live View Display may be dark
for some shutter speed settings. When [Live View Display] is set to [Setting Effect OFF],
Live View Display will be displayed brightly, so that you can easily check the composition.
[153] How to Use Using shooting functions Setting the other functions of this product
Bright Monitoring
Allows you to adjust the composition when shooting in dark environments. By extending the
exposure time, you can check the composition on the viewfinder/monitor even in dark
locations such as under the night sky.
1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [Custom Key Settings] → assign the [Bright
Monitoring] function to the desired key.
2. Press the key to which you assigned the [Bright Monitoring] function, then shoot an
image.
The brightness due to [Bright Monitoring] will continue after shooting.
To return the monitor brightness to normal, press the key to which you assigned the
[Bright Monitoring] function once again.
Note
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
During [Bright Monitoring], [Live View Display] will automatically switch to [Setting Effect
OFF], and setting values such as exposure compensation will not be reflected in the live
view display. It is recommended that you use [Bright Monitoring] only in dark locations.
[Bright Monitoring] will be automatically cancelled in the following situations.
When the camera is turned off.
When the mode dial is turned.
When the focus mode is set to other than manual focus.
When [ MF Assist] is set to [On].
When [Focus Magnifier] is selected.
During [Bright Monitoring], the shutter speed may be slower than normal while shooting in
dark locations.
[154] How to Use Using shooting functions Setting the other functions of this product
FINDER/MONITOR
Sets the method for switching the display between Electronic Viewfinder and the screen.
1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [FINDER/MONITOR] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Auto:
When you look into the Electronic Viewfinder, the display is switched to the Electronic
Viewfinder automatically.
Viewfinder(Manual):
The screen is turned off and the image is displayed only in the Electronic Viewfinder.
Monitor(Manual):
The Electronic Viewfinder is turned off and the image is always displayed on the screen.
Hint
You can assign the [FINDER/MONITOR] function to your preferred key. MENU →
(Custom Settings) → [Custom Key Settings] → set [Finder/Monitor Sel.] to the preferred
key.
To turn off automatic switching of the display using the eye sensor, set
[FINDER/MONITOR] to [Viewfinder(Manual)] or [Monitor(Manual)].
[155] How to Use Using shooting functions Setting the other functions of this product
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Release w/o Card
Sets whether the shutter can be released when no memory card has been inserted.
1. MENU→(Custom Settings) → [Release w/o Card] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Enable:
Releases the shutter even if no memory card has been inserted.
Disable:
Does not release the shutter when no memory card has been inserted.
Note
When no memory card has been inserted, the images shot will not be saved.
The default setting is [Enable]. It is recommended that you select [Disable] prior to actual
shooting.
[156] How to Use Using shooting functions Setting the other functions of this product
Shutter Type (still image)
You can set whether to shoot with a mechanical shutter or an electronic shutter.
1. MENU→ (Custom Settings)→[Shutter Type]→desired setting.
Menu item details
Auto:
The shutter type is automatically switched based on the shooting conditions and shutter
speed.
Mechanical Shut.:
Shoot with the mechanical shutter only.
Electronic Shut.:
Shoot with the electronic shutter only.
The availability of flash shooting, shutter speed, and with or without shutter sound for each
setting is as below.
Mechanical Shut.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Flash:
Shutter speed: BULB to 1/3200 second *2
Shutter sound: mechanical shutter sound and electronic shutter sound *3
Electronic Shut.
Flash: *1
Shutter speed: 30 seconds to 1/32000 second *2
Shutter sound: electronic shutter sound *3
*1 When shooting with the flash, the shutter speed is limited to 1/100 second or slower.
*2 The settable shutter speed range varies by shooting mode.
*3 To turn off the electronic sound, set [Audio signals] to [Off].
Hint
In the following situations, set the [Shutter Type] to [Auto] or [Electronic Shut.].
When shooting with a high-speed shutter in a bright environment such as outside in bright
sunlight, the beach, or snowy mountains.
When you want to increase the speed of continuous shooting and speed priority continuous
shooting.
In the following situations, set the [Shutter Type] to [Auto] or [Mechanical Shut.].
When you want to use the flash with a shutter speed faster than 1/100 second.
When you are concerned about distortion in the image due to the movement of the subject or the
movement of the camera.
Note
When shooting with the electronic shutter, there may be distortion in the image due to the
movement of the subject or the camera itself.
During shooting with the electronic shutter, band-like light-and-dark shading may appear
when shooting under flickering light such as fluorescent light or instantaneous light (such
as the flash of another camera).
In rare cases, the shutter sound may be produced when the power is turned off even if the
[Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shut.]. However, this is not a malfunction.
In the following situations, the mechanical shutter will be activated even if the [ Shutter
Type] is set to [Electronic Shut.].
[White Balance] is set to [Custom Setup]
[Face Registration]
The following functions are unavailable when the [Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic
Shut.].
Long Exposure NR
Bulb shooting
The [ Shutter Type] setting may be cancelled when shooting with a function
downloaded from PlayMemories Camera Apps.
When an external flash is attached and the shutter speed is high, a belt-like contrast may
be recorded on the image. Set [Shutter Type] to [Mechanical Shut.] before taking
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
pictures. When using an external flash, the highest shutter speed you can set is 1/4000
second.
[157] How to Use Using shooting functions Setting the other functions of this product
Dial / Wheel Lock
You can set whether the dial and wheel will be locked by pressing and holding the Fn
(Function) button.
1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [Dial / Wheel Lock] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Lock:
Locks the control dial and control wheel.
Unlock:
Does not lock the control dial or control wheel even if you press and hold the Fn (Function)
button.
Hint
You can release the locked dial/control wheel by holding the Fn (Function) button down.
[158] How to Use Using shooting functions Setting the other functions of this product
Deactivate Monitor
When you press the key to which the [Deactivate Monitor] function has been assigned, the
monitor turns black, and the screen display is locked to [No Disp. Info.].
1. MENU → (Custom Settings) → [Custom Key Settings] → set the [Deactivate
Monitor] function to the desired key.
2. Press the key to which [Deactivate Monitor] was assigned.
Note
Even if you perform [Deactivate Monitor], the backlight of monitor remains on. To turn off
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
the backlight, switch the monitor mode to viewfinder mode using the [FINDER/MONITOR]
function.
[159] How to Use Using shooting functions Setting the other functions of this product
ND Filter
If you use an ND filter, the amount of light entering the camera is reduced. You can slow
down the shutter speed and decrease the aperture value for a better exposure.
1. MENU → (Camera Settings) → [ND Filter] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Auto:
Automatically turns on the ND filter based on the shooting mode and brightness.
On:
Always uses [ND Filter].
Off:
Disables the [ND Filter] function.
Hint
When the ND filter is activated, the icon is displayed on the bottom of the screen.
[160] How to Use Viewing Viewing still images
Playing back images
Plays back the recorded images.
1. Press the (Playback) button to switch to the playback mode.
2. Select the image with the control wheel.
Hint
The product creates an image database file on a memory card to record and play back
images. An image that is not registered in the image database file may not be played
back correctly. To play back images shot using other devices, register those images to
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
the image database file using MENU → [Setup] → [Recover Image DB].
[161] How to Use Viewing Viewing still images
Playback zoom
Enlarges the image being played back.
1. Display the image you want to enlarge, and slide the W/T (zoom) lever to the T side.
Slide the W/T (zoom) lever to the W side to adjust the zoom scale.
The view will zoom in on the part of the image where the camera focused during
shooting. If the focus location information cannot be obtained, the camera will zoom
in on the center of the image.
2. Select the portion you want to enlarge by pressing the top/bottom/right/left side of the
control wheel.
3. Press the MENU button, or in the center of the control wheel to exit the playback
zoom.
Hint
You can also enlarge an image being played back using MENU.
Note
You cannot enlarge movies.
[162] How to Use Viewing Viewing still images
Image Index
You can display multiple images at the same time in playback mode.
1. Slide the W/T (zoom) lever to the W side while the image is being played back.
To change the number of images to be displayed
MENU → (Playback) → [Image Index] → desired setting.
Menu item details
9 Images/25 Images
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
To return to single-image playback
Select the desired image and press on the center of the control wheel.
To display a desired image quickly
Select the bar on the left of the image index screen using the control wheel, then press the
top/bottom side of the control wheel. While the bar is being selected, you can display the
calendar screen or folder selection screen by pressing in the center. In addition, you can
switch View Mode by selecting an icon.
[163] How to Use Viewing Viewing still images
Switching the screen display (during playback)
Switches the screen display.
1. Press the DISP (Display Setting) button.
The screen display switches in the order “Display Info. → Histogram → No Disp.
Info. → Display Info.” each time you press the DISP button.
The DISP (Display Setting) settings are applied for the Auto Review display.
Note
The histogram is not displayed in the following situations:
During movie playback
During scrolling playback of panoramic images
During slideshows
During Folder View (MP4)
During AVCHD View
During XAVC S 4K View
During XAVC S HD View
[164] How to Use Viewing Deleting images
Deleting a displayed image
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
You can delete an image displayed.
1. Display the image you want to delete.
2. Press the (Delete) button.
3. Select [Delete] using the control wheel, then press on the center of the control
wheel.
[165] How to Use Viewing Deleting images
Deleting multiple selected images
You can delete multiple selected images.
1. MENU → (Playback) → [Delete] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Multiple Img.:
Deletes the selected images.
(1) Select the images to be deleted, then press on the center of the control wheel. The
mark is displayed in the check box. To cancel the selection, press again to remove
the mark.
(2) To delete other images, repeat step (1).
(3) MENU → [OK] → Press on the center.
All in this Folder:
Deletes all images in the selected folder.
All with this date:
Deletes all images in the selected date range.
Hint
Perform [Format] to delete all images, including protected images.
Note
The menu items that can be selected differ depending on the [View Mode] setting.
[166] How to Use Viewing Playing back movies
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Playing back movies
Plays back the recorded movies.
1. Press the (playback) button to switch to playback mode.
2. Select the movie to be played back using the control wheel.
3. To play back movies, press on the center.
Available operations during movie playback
You can perform slow playback and sound volume adjustment, etc. by pressing the bottom
side of the control wheel.
: Playback
: Pause
: Fast-forward
: Fast-rewind
: Forward slow playback
: Reverse slow playback
: Next movie file
: Previous movie file
: Displays the next frame
: Displays the previous frame
: Motion Shot Video (Shows the tracking of a subject in motion.)
: Sound volume adjustment
: Closes the operation panel
Hint
“Forward slow playback,” “Reverse slow playback,” “Displays the next frame” and
“Displays the previous frame” are available during pause.
[167] How to Use Viewing Playing back movies
Motion Shot Video
You can see the tracking of the subject's motion in high-speed, like a stroboscopic image.
1. Press the bottom side of the control wheel during movie playback, then select .
To exit [Motion Shot Video] playback, select .
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
If you fail to make the trail, you can adjust the interval of the image tracking using
.
Note
You cannot save the images made with [Motion Shot Video] as a movie file.
If the motion of the subject is too slow or the subject does not move enough, the product
may fail to create the image.
Hint
You can also change the interval of the image tracking using MENU → (Playback)
→ [Motion Interval ADJ].
[168] How to Use Viewing Viewing panoramic images
Playing back panoramic images
The product automatically scrolls a panoramic image from end to end.
1. Press the (playback) button to switch to playback mode.
2. Select the panoramic image to be played back using the control wheel.
3. Press on the center to play back the image.
To pause playback, press on the center again.
To return to the display of the entire image, press the MENU button.
Note
Panoramic images shot using other products may be displayed in a different size from the
actual size, or may not scroll correctly.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
[169] How to Use Viewing Printing
Specify Printing
You can specify in advance on the memory card which still images you want to print out
later.
The (print order) icon will appear on the specified images. DPOF refers to “Digital
Print Order Format.”
1. MENU → (Playback) → [Specify Printing] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Multiple Img.:
Selects images to order printing.
(1) Select an image and press on the center of the control wheel. The mark is
displayed in the check box. To cancel the selection, press and delete the mark.
(2) Repeat step (1) to print other images.
(3) MENU → [OK] → Press on the center.
Cancel All:
Clears all DPOF marks.
Print Setting:
Sets whether to print the date on images registered with DPOF marks.
Note
You cannot add the DPOF mark to the following files:
Movies
RAW images
[170] How to Use Viewing Using viewing functions
View Mode
Sets the View Mode (image display method).
1. MENU → (Playback) → [View Mode] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Date View:
Displays the images by date.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Folder View(Still):
Displays only still images.
Folder View(MP4):
Displays only MP4-format movies.
AVCHD View:
Displays only AVCHD-format movies.
XAVC S HD View:
Displays only XAVC S HD-format movies.
XAVC S 4K View:
Displays only XAVC S 4K-format movies.
[171] How to Use Viewing Using viewing functions
Display Rotation
Selects the orientation when playing back recorded still images.
1. MENU → (Playback) → [Display Rotation] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Auto:
When you rotate the camera, the displayed image rotates automatically detecting the
orientation of the camera.
Manual:
A portrait image is displayed as a vertical image. If you have set the image orientation using
the [Rotate] function, the image will be displayed accordingly.
Off:
Always displays in landscape orientation.
[172] How to Use Viewing Using viewing functions
Slide Show
Automatically plays back images continuously.
1. MENU → (Playback) → [Slide Show] → desired setting.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
2. Select [Enter].
Menu item details
Repeat:
Select [On], in which images are played back in a continuous loop, or [Off], in which the
product exits the slideshow when all the images are played back once.
Interval:
Select the display interval for images from among [1 Sec], [3 Sec], [5 Sec], [10 Sec] or [30
Sec].
To quit the slideshow in the middle of playback
Press the MENU button to quit the slideshow. You cannot pause the slideshow.
Hint
You can activate a slideshow only when [View Mode] is set to [Date View] or [Folder
View(Still)].
[173] How to Use Viewing Using viewing functions
Rotate
Rotates a recorded still image counter-clockwise.
1. MENU → (Playback) → [Rotate].
2. Press on the center of the control wheel.
The image is rotated counter-clockwise. The image rotates as you press on the
center. If you rotate the image once, the image remains rotated even after the product
is turned off.
Note
You cannot rotate the movies.
You may not be able to rotate images shot using other products.
When viewing rotated images on a computer, the images may be displayed in their
original orientation depending on the software.
[174] How to Use Viewing Using viewing functions
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Protect
Protects recorded images against accidental erasure. The mark is displayed on
protected images.
1. MENU → (Playback) → [Protect] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Multiple Img.:
Applies or cancels the protection of the selected multiple images.
(1) Select the image to be protected, then press on the center of the control wheel. The
mark is displayed in the check box. To cancel the selection, press again to remove
the mark.
(2) To protect other images, repeat step (1).
(3) MENU → [OK] → Press on the center.
All in this Folder:
Protects all images in the selected folder.
All with this date:
Protects all images in the selected date range.
Cancel All in this Folder:
Cancels the protection of all images in the selected folder.
Cancel All with this date:
Cancels the protection of all images in the selected date range.
Note
The menu items that can be selected differ depending on the [View Mode] setting.
[175] How to Use Viewing Viewing images on a TV
Viewing images on an HD TV
To view images stored on this product using a TV, an HDMI cable (sold separately) and an
HD TV equipped with an HDMI jack are required.
1. Turn off both this product and the TV.
2. Connect the HDMI micro terminal of this product to the HDMI jack of the TV using an
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
HDMI cable (sold separately).
3. Turn on the TV and switch the input.
4. Turn on this product.
Images shot with the product appear on the TV screen.
Hint
This product is compatible with the PhotoTV HD standard. If you connect Sony PhotoTV
HD-compatible devices using an HDMI cable (sold separately), the TV is set to the image
quality suitable for viewing still images, and a whole new world of photos can be enjoyed
in breathtaking high quality.
You can connect this product to Sony PhotoTV HD-compatible devices with a USB
terminal using the supplied micro USB cable.
The PhotoTV HD allows for a highly-detailed, photo-like expression of subtle textures and
colors.
For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the compatible TV.
Note
Do not connect this product and another device using the output terminals of both. Doing
so may cause a malfunction.
Some devices may not work properly when connected to this product. For example, they
may not output video or audio.
Use an HDMI cable with the HDMI logo or a genuine Sony cable.
Use an HDMI cable that is compatible with the HDMI micro terminal of the product and
the HDMI jack of the TV.
When [ TC Output] is set to [On], the image may not be output properly to the TV or
recording device. In such cases, set [TC Output] to [Off].
If images do not appear on the TV screen properly, select [1080i], [2160p/1080p] or
[1080p] using (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [HDMI Resolution] according to the TV
to be connected.
During HDMI output, when you switch the movie from 4K to HD image quality or vice-
versa, or change the movie to a different frame rate, the screen may become dark. This is
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
not a malfunction.
[176] How to Use Viewing Viewing images on a TV
Viewing images on a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV
By connecting this product to a TV that supports “BRAVIA” Sync using an HDMI cable (sold
separately), you can operate this product's playback functions with the TV remote control.
1. Turn off both this product and the TV.
2. Connect the HDMI micro terminal of the product to the HDMI jack of the TV using an
HDMI cable (sold separately).
3. Turn on the TV and switch the input.
4. Turn on this product.
5. MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [CTRL FOR HDMI] → [On].
6. Press the SYNC MENU button on the TV remote control, and select the desired mode.
Note
If the product is not in playback mode, press the (Playback) button.
Only TVs that support “BRAVIA” Sync can provide SYNC MENU operations. For details,
refer to the operating instructions supplied with the TV.
If the product performs unwanted operations in response to the TV remote control when
the product is connected to another manufacturer’s TV using an HDMI connection, select
MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [CTRL FOR HDMI] → [Off].
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
[177] How to Use Changing settings Setup menu
Monitor Brightness
You can adjust the brightness of the screen.
1. MENU → (Setup) → [Monitor Brightness] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Manual:
Adjusts the brightness within the range of –2 to +2.
Sunny Weather:
Sets the brightness appropriately for shooting outdoors.
Note
The [Sunny Weather] setting is too bright for shooting indoors. Set [Monitor Brightness] to
[Manual] for indoor shooting.
The monitor brightness cannot be adjusted in the following situations. The maximum
brightness will be [±0].
[File Format] is [XAVC S 4K].
[File Format] is [XAVC S HD] and the [Record Setting] is [120p]/[100p].
The monitor brightness is locked at [-2] when using Wi-Fi functions.
[178] How to Use Changing settings Setup menu
Viewfinder Bright.
When using an electronic viewfinder, this product adjusts the brightness of the electronic
viewfinder according to the surrounding environment.
1. MENU → (Setup) → [Viewfinder Bright.] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Auto:
Adjusts the brightness of the electronic viewfinder automatically.
Manual:
Selects the brightness of the electronic viewfinder from the range –2 to +2.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Note
The electronic viewfinder brightness cannot be adjusted in the following situations. The
maximum brightness will be [±0].
[File Format] is [XAVC S 4K].
[File Format] is [XAVC S HD] and the [Record Setting] is [120p]/[100p].
You cannot use the viewfinder while using Wi-Fi functions. The camera will switch to
screen display mode.
[179] How to Use Changing settings Setup menu
Finder Color Temp.
Adjusts the color temperature of the electronic viewfinder.
1. MENU → (Setup) → [Finder Color Temp.] → desired setting.
Menu item details
-2 to +2:
When you select “-,” the viewfinder screen changes to a warmer color, and when you select
“+,” it changes to a colder color.
[180] How to Use Changing settings Setup menu
Volume Settings
Sets the sound volume for movie playback.
1. MENU → (Setup) → [Volume Settings] → desired setting.
Adjusting the volume during playback
Press the bottom of the control wheel while playing back movies to display the operation
panel, then adjust the volume. You can adjust the volume while listening to the actual sound.
[181] How to Use Changing settings Setup menu
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Audio signals
Selects whether the product produces a sound or not.
1. MENU → (Setup) → [Audio signals] → desired setting.
Menu item details
On:
Sounds are produced for example when the focus is achieved by pressing the shutter button
halfway down.
Shutter:
Only the shutter sound is produced.
Off:
Sounds are not produced.
Note
If [Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF], the camera will not beep when it focuses on a
subject.
[182] How to Use Changing settings Setup menu
Upload Settings(Eye-Fi)
Sets whether to use the upload function when using an Eye-Fi card (commercially
available). This item appears when an Eye-Fi card is inserted into the product’s memory
card slot.
1. MENU → (Setup) → [Upload Settings] → desired setting.
2. Set your Wi-Fi network or destination on the Eye-Fi card.
For details, refer to the manual supplied with the Eye-Fi card.
3. Insert the Eye-Fi card you have set up into the product, and shoot still images.
Images are transferred to your computer, etc., automatically via the Wi-Fi network.
Menu item details
On:
Enables the upload function.
Off:
Disables the upload function.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Communication status screen display
: Standby. No images are to be sent.
: Upload standby
: Connecting
: Uploading
: Error
Note
Eye-Fi cards are only sold in certain countries/regions.
For more information on Eye-Fi cards, please contact the manufacturer or vendor directly.
Eye-Fi cards can be used only in the countries/regions where they were purchased. Use
Eye-Fi cards in accordance with the law of the countries/regions where you purchased
the card.
Eye-Fi cards are equipped with a wireless LAN function. Do not insert an Eye-Fi card into
the product in locations in which their use is prohibited, such as on an airplane. When an
Eye-Fi card is inserted into the product, set [Upload Settings] to [Off]. When the upload
function is set to [Off], the indicator will be displayed on the product.
Power save mode will not function during uploading.
If (error) is displayed, remove the memory card and reinsert it, or turn the product
off and then on again. If the indicator appears again, the Eye-Fi card may be damaged.
Wireless LAN communication may be influenced by other communication devices. If the
communication status is poor, move closer to the access point to be connected.
This product does not support Eye-Fi “Endless Memory Mode.” Before using an Eye-Fi
card, be sure that “Endless Memory Mode” is turned off.
[183] How to Use Changing settings Setup menu
Tile Menu
Selects whether to always display the first screen of the menu when you press the MENU
button.
1. MENU →(Setup) → [Tile Menu] → desired setting.
Menu item details
On:
Always displays the first screen of the menu (Tile Menu).
Off:
Deactivates the Tile Menu display.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
[184] How to Use Changing settings Setup menu
Mode Dial Guide
You can display the description of a shooting mode when you turn the mode dial and change
the settings available for that shooting mode.
1. MENU → (Setup) → [Mode Dial Guide] → desired setting.
Menu item details
On:
Displays the Mode Dial Guide.
Off:
Does not display the Mode Dial Guide.
[185] How to Use Changing settings Setup menu
Delete confirm.
You can set whether [Delete] or [Cancel] is selected as the default setting on the delete
confirmation screen.
1. MENU →(Setup) → [Delete confirm.] → desired setting.
Menu item details
"Delete" first:
[Delete] is selected as the default setting.
"Cancel" first:
[Cancel] is selected as the default setting.
[186] How to Use Changing settings Setup menu
Display Quality
You can change the display quality.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
1. MENU → (Setup) → [Display Quality] → desired setting.
Menu item details
High:
Displays in high quality.
Standard:
Displays in standard quality.
Note
When [High] is set, battery consumption will be higher than when [Standard] is set.
[187] How to Use Changing settings Setup menu
Pwr Save Start Time
You can set time intervals to automatically switch to power save mode. To return to shooting
mode, perform an operation such as pressing the shutter button halfway down.
1. MENU → (Setup) → [Pwr Save Start Time] → desired setting.
Menu item details
30 Min/5 Min/2 Min/1 Min/10 Sec
Note
Turn off the product when you do not use it for a long time.
The power save function is not activated when power is being supplied via USB, when
playing back slideshows, when recording movies, or when connected to a computer or
TV.
[188] How to Use Changing settings Setup menu
NTSC/PAL Selector
Plays back movies recorded with the product on a NTSC/PAL system TV.
1. MENU → (Setup) → [NTSC/PAL Selector] → [Enter]
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Note
If you insert a memory card that has previously been formatted with a different video
system, a message telling you that you must reformat the card will appear.
If you want to record using another system, re-format the memory card or use another
memory card.
When you perform [NTSC/PAL Selector], and the setting is changed from the default one,
a message "Running on NTSC." or "Running on PAL." will appear on the start-up screen.
[189] How to Use Changing settings Setup menu
Demo Mode
The [Demo Mode] function displays the movies recorded on the memory card automatically
(demonstration), when the camera has not been operated for a certain time. Normally select
[Off].
1. MENU → (Setup) → [Demo Mode] → desired setting.
Menu item details
On:
The movie playback demonstration starts automatically if the product is not operated for
about one minute. Only protected AVCHD movies are played back.
Set the view mode to [AVCHD View], and protect the movie file with the oldest recorded
date and time.
Off:
Does not show the demonstration.
Note
You can set this item only when the product is powered by the AC Adaptor (supplied).
Even if [On] is selected, the product does not start a demonstration if there is no movie file
on the memory card.
When [On] is selected, the product does not switch to power save mode.
[190] How to Use Changing settings Setup menu
TC/UB Settings
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
The time code (TC) and the user bit (UB) information can be recorded as data attached to
movies.
1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → setting value you want to change.
Menu item details
TC/UB Disp. Setting:
Sets the display for the counter, time code, and user bit.
TC Preset:
Sets the time code.
UB Preset:
Sets the user bit.
TC Format:
Sets the recording method for the time code. (Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to
NTSC.)
TC Run:
Sets the count up format for the time code.
TC Make:
Sets the recording format for the time code on the recording medium.
UB Time Rec:
Sets whether or not to record the time as a user bit.
How to set the time code (TC Preset)
1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Preset], then press in the center
of the control wheel.
2. Turn the control wheel and select the first two digits.
The time code can be set between the following range.
When [60i] is selected: 00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:29
*When [24p] is selected, you can select the last two digits of the time code in
multiples of four from 0 to 23 frames.
When [50i] is selected: 00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:24
3. Set the other digits following the same procedure as in step 2, then press in the
center of the control wheel.
How to reset the time code
1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] →[TC Preset], then press in the center
of the control wheel.
2. Press the (Delete) button to reset the time code (00:00:00:00).
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
You can also reset the time code (00:00:00:00) using the RMT-VP1K remote commander
(sold separately).
How to set the user bit (UB Preset)
1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [UB Preset], then press in the center
of the control wheel.
2. Turn the control wheel and select the first two digits.
3. Set the other digits following the same procedure as in step 2, then press in the
center of the control wheel.
How to reset the user bit
1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [UB Preset], then press in the center
of the control wheel.
2. Press the (Delete) button to reset the user bit (00 00 00 00).
How to select the recording method for the time code (TC Format*1)
1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Format], then press in the
center of the control wheel.
DF:
Records the time code in Drop Frame*2 format.
NDF:
Records the time code in Non-Drop Frame format.
*1 Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.
*2 The time code is based on 30 frames per second. However, a gap between the actual time and the
time code will occur during extended periods of recording as the frame frequency of the NTSC image
signal is approximately 29.97 frames per second. Drop frame corrects this gap to make the time code
and actual time equal. In drop frame, the first 2 frame numbers are removed every minute except for
every tenth minute. The time code without this correction is called non-drop frame.
The setting is fixed to [NDF] when recording in 4K/24p or 1080/24p.
How to select the count up format for the time code (TC Run)
1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Run], then press in the center of
the control wheel.
Rec Run:
Sets the stepping mode for the time code to advance only while recording. The time code is
recorded sequentially from the last time code of the previous recording.
Free Run:
Sets the stepping mode for the time code to advance anytime, regardless of the camera
operation.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
The time code may not be recorded sequentially in the following situations even when the
time code advances in [Rec Run] mode.
When the recording format is changed.
When the recording medium is removed.
How to select how the time code is recorded (TC Make)
1. MENU → (Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Make], then press in the center
of the control wheel.
Preset:
Records the newly set time code on the recording medium.
Regenerate:
Reads the last time code for the previous recording from the recording medium and records
the new time code consecutively from the last time code. The time code advances in [Rec
Run] mode regardless of the [TC Run] setting.
[191] How to Use Changing settings Setup menu
HDMI Resolution
When you connect the product to a High Definition (HD) TV with HDMI terminals using an
HDMI cable (sold separately), you can select HDMI Resolution to output images to the TV.
1. MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [HDMI Resolution] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Auto:
The product automatically recognizes an HD TV and sets the output resolution.
2160p/1080p:
Outputs signals in 2160p/1080p.
1080p:
Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080p).
1080i:
Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080i).
Note
If the images are not displayed properly using the [Auto] setting, select either [1080i],
[1080p] or [2160p/1080p], based on which TV is to be connected.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
[192] How to Use Changing settings Setup menu
24p/60p Output (movie) (Only for 1080 60i compatible
models)
Set 1080/24p or 1080/60p as the HDMI output format when [Record Setting] is set to
[24p 24M(FX)], [24p 17M(FH)], or [24p 50M].
1. MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [HDMI Resolution] → [1080p] or
[2160p/1080p].
2. MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [ 24p/60p Output] → desired setting.
Menu item details
60p:
Movies are output as 60p.
24p:
Movies are output as 24p.
Note
Steps 1 and 2 can be set in either order.
When [ Record Setting] is set to other than the above, this setting is canceled, and
HDMI video is output according to the [HDMI Resolution] settings.
[193] How to Use Changing settings Setup menu
CTRL FOR HDMI
When connecting this product to a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV using an HDMI cable (sold
separately), you can operate this product by aiming the TV remote control at the TV.
1. MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [CTRL FOR HDMI] → desired setting.
Menu item details
On:
You can operate this product with a TV’s remote control.
Off:
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
You cannot operate this product with a TV’s remote control.
Note
[CTRL FOR HDMI] is available only with a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV.
[194] How to Use Changing settings Setup menu
HDMI Info. Display
Selects whether to display the shooting information when this product and the TV are
connected using an HDMI cable (sold separately).
1. MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [HDMI Info. Display] → desired setting.
Menu item details
On:
Displays the shooting information on the TV. The recorded image and the shooting
information are displayed on the TV, while nothing is displayed on the camera’s monitor.
Off:
Does not display the shooting information on the TV. Only the recorded image is displayed
on the TV, while the recorded image and the shooting information are displayed on the
camera’s monitor.
[195] How to Use Changing settings Setup menu
TC Output (movie)
Sets whether or not to layer the TC (time code) information on the output signal via the
HDMI terminal when outputting the signal to other professional-use devices.
This function layers the time code information on the HDMI output signal. The product sends
the time code information as digital data, not as an image displayed on the screen. The
connected device can then refer to the digital data to recognize the time data.
1. MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [ TC Output] → desired setting.
Menu item details
On:
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Time code is output to other devices.
Off:
Time code is not output to other devices.
Note
When [ TC Output] is set to [On], the image may not be output properly to the TV or
recording device. In such cases, set [TC Output] to [Off].
[196] How to Use Changing settings Setup menu
REC Control (movie)
If you connect the camera to an external recorder/player, you can remotely command the
recorder/player to start/stop recording using the camera.
1. MENU → (Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [ REC Control] → desired setting.
Menu item details
On:
The camera can send a recording command to an external recorder/player.
The camera is sending a recording command to an external recorder/player.
Off:
The camera is not able to send a command to an external recorder/player to start/stop
recording.
Note
Available for external recorders/players compatible with [REC Control].
When [ TC Output] is [Off], [REC Control] is set to [Off].
Even when is displayed, the external recorder/player may not work properly
depending on the settings or status of the recorder/player. Check if the external
recorder/player works properly before use.
[197] How to Use Changing settings Setup menu
4K Output Sel. (movie)
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
You can set how to record movies and perform HDMI output when your camera is connected
to 4K-compatible external recording/playback devices, etc.
1. Turn the mode dial to (movie).
2. Connect the camera to the desired device via an HDMI cable.
3. MENU→ (Setup)→[4K Output Sel.]→desired setting.
Menu item details
Memory Card+HDMI:
Simultaneously outputs to the external recording/playback device and records on the
camera's memory card.
HDMI Only(30p):
Outputs a 4K movie in 30p to the external recording/playback device without recording on
the camera's memory card.
HDMI Only(24p):
Outputs a 4K movie in 24p to the external recording/playback device without recording on
the camera's memory card.
HDMI Only(25p)*:
Outputs a 4K movie in 25p to the external recording/playback device without recording on
the camera’s memory card.
* Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to PAL.
Note
This item can be set only when the camera is in movie mode and connected to a 4K-
compatible device.
When [HDMI Only(30p)], [HDMI Only(25p)] or [HDMI Only(24p)] is set, the [HDMI Info.
Display] will temporarily be set to [Off].
The counter does not move forward when 4K movies are being output.
The following functions are not available when the camera is connected via an HDMI
cable and the [File Format] is [XAVC S 4K], or when the [File Format] is [XAVC
S 4K] and [Dual Video REC] is [On].
[Smile/Face Detect.]
[Lock- on AF] under [Focus Area]
[Center Lock-on AF]
[Eye AF]
[198] How to Use Changing settings Setup menu
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
USB Connection
Selects the appropriate USB connection method for each computer or USB device
connected to this product.
1. MENU → (Setup) → [USB Connection] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Auto:
Establishes a Mass Storage or MTP connection automatically, depending on the computer or
other USB devices to be connected. Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in
MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.
Mass Storage:
Establishes a Mass Storage connection between this product, a computer, and other USB
devices.
MTP:
Establishes an MTP connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices.
Windows 7 or Windows 8 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are
enabled for use.
PC Remote:
Uses “Remote Camera Control” to control this product from the computer, including such
functions as shooting and storing images on the computer.
Note
It may take some time to make the connection between this product and a computer
when [USB Connection] is set to [Auto].
If Device Stage* is not displayed with Windows 7 or Windows 8, set [USB Connection] to
[Auto].
* Device Stage is a menu screen used to manage connected devices, such as a camera
(Function of Windows 7 or Windows 8).
[199] How to Use Changing settings Setup menu
USB LUN Setting
Enhances compatibility by limiting of USB connection functions.
1. MENU → (Setup) → [USB LUN Setting] → desired setting.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Menu item details
Multi:
Normally, use [Multi].
Single:
Set [USB LUN Setting] to [Single] only if you cannot make a connection.
[200] How to Use Changing settings Setup menu
USB Power Supply
Sets whether to supply power via the micro USB cable when the product is connected to a
computer or an USB device.
1. MENU → (Setup) → [USB Power Supply] → desired setting.
Menu item details
On:
Power is supplied to the product via a micro USB cable when the product is connected to a
computer, etc.
Off:
Power is not supplied to the product via a micro USB cable when the product is connected to
a computer, etc. If you use the supplied AC Adaptor, power will be supplied even when [Off]
is selected.
Note
Insert the battery pack into the product to supply power via USB cable.
[201] How to Use Changing settings Setup menu
Language
Selects the language to be used in the menu items, warnings and messages.
1. MENU → (Setup) → [ Language] → desired language.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
[202] How to Use Changing settings Setup menu
Date/Time Setup
Sets the date and time again.
1. MENU → (Setup) → [Date/Time Setup] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Daylight Savings:
Selects Daylight Savings [On]/[Off].
Date/Time:
Sets the date and time.
Date Format:
Selects the date and time display format.
[203] How to Use Changing settings Setup menu
Area Setting
Sets the area where you are using the product.
1. MENU → (Setup) → [Area Setting] → desired area.
[204] How to Use Changing settings Setup menu
Copyright Info
You can write copyright information onto the still images.
1. MENU→(Setup)→[Copyright Info]→ desired setting.
2. When you select [Set Photographer] or [Set Copyright], a keyboard appears on the
screen. Enter your desired name.
Menu item details
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Write Copyright Info:
Sets whether to write copyright information. ([On]/[Off])
If you select [On], an icon will appear on the shooting screen.
Set Photographer:
Sets the photographer name.
Set Copyright:
Sets the copyright holder name.
Disp. Copyright Info:
Displays the current copyright information.
Hint
How to use the keyboard
When manual character entry is required, a keyboard is displayed on the screen.
1. Input box
The characters you entered are displayed.
2. Switch character types
Each time you press in the center of the control wheel, the character type will
switch between alphabet letters, numerals and symbols.
3. Keyboard
Each time you press in the center, the characters corresponding to that key will be
displayed one-by-one in order.
For example: If you want to enter “abd”
Select the key for “abc” and press once to display “a” → select “ ”((5) Move
cursor) and press → select the key for “abc” and press twice to display “b” →
select the key for “def” and press once to display “d”.
4. Finalize
Finalizes the entered characters.
5.
Move cursor
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Moves the cursor in the input box to the right or left.
6. Delete
Deletes the character preceding the cursor.
7.
Switches the next character to a capital or lowercase letter.
8.
Enters a space.
To cancel input, select [Cancel].
Note
You can only enter alphanumeric characters and symbols for [Set Photographer] and [Set
Copyright]. You can enter up to 46 letters.
A icon appears during the playback of images with copyright information.
In order to prevent unauthorized use of [Copyright Info], be sure to clear the [Set
Photographer] and [Set Copyright] columns before lending out or handing over your
camera.
[205] How to Use Changing settings Setup menu
Format
Formats (initializes) the memory card. When you use a memory card with this product for the
first time, it is recommended that you format the card using the product for stable
performance of the memory card. Note that formatting permanently erases all data on the
memory card, and is unrecoverable. Save valuable data on a computer, etc.
1. MENU → (Setup) → [Format].
Note
Formatting permanently erases all data including even protected images.
[206] How to Use Changing settings Setup menu
File Number
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Selects how to assign file numbers to recorded still images and MP4 movies.
1. MENU → (Setup) → [File Number] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Series:
The product will assign numbers to files sequentially up to “9999” without resetting.
Reset:
The product resets numbers when a file is recorded in a new folder and assigns numbers to
files starting with “0001.”
(When the recording folder contains a file, a number one higher than the largest number is
assigned.)
[207] How to Use Changing settings Setup menu
Select REC Folder
You can change the folder on the memory card where still images and MP4 movies are to be
recorded.
1. MENU → (Setup) → [Select REC Folder] → desired folder.
Note
You cannot select the folder when [Folder Name] is set to [Date Form].
[208] How to Use Changing settings Setup menu
New Folder
Creates a new folder on the memory card for recording still images and MP4 movies. A new
folder is created with a folder number one greater than the largest folder number currently
used. Images are recorded in the newly created folder. A folder for still images and a folder
for MP4 movies that have the same number are created at the same time.
1. MENU → (Setup) → [New Folder].
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Note
When you insert a memory card that was used with other equipment into this product and
shoot images, a new folder may be automatically created.
Up to 4,000 images in total can be stored in one folder. When the folder capacity is
exceeded, a new folder may be automatically created.
[209] How to Use Changing settings Setup menu
Folder Name
Still images are recorded in a folder that is automatically created inside the DCIM folder on
the memory card. You can change the way folder names are assigned.
1. MENU → (Setup) → [Folder Name] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Standard Form:
The folder name form is as follows: folder number + MSDCF.
Example: 100MSDCF
Date Form:
The folder name form is as follows: folder number + Y (the last digit)/MM/DD.
Example: 10050405 (Folder number: 100, date: 04/05/2015)
Note
You cannot change the [Folder Name] settings for movies.
[210] How to Use Changing settings Setup menu
Recover Image DB
If image files were processed on a computer, problems may occur in the image database file.
In such cases, the images on the memory card will not be played back on this product. If
these problems happen, repair the file using [Recover Image DB].
1. MENU →(Setup) → [Recover Image DB] → [Enter].
Note
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Use a sufficiently charged battery pack. Low battery power during repairing can cause
damage to data.
[211] How to Use Changing settings Setup menu
Display Media Info.
Displays the recordable time of movies and the number of recordable still images for the
inserted memory card.
1. MENU → (Setup) → [Display Media Info.].
[212] How to Use Changing settings Setup menu
Version
Displays the version of this product’s software.
1. MENU → (Setup) → [Version].
[213] How to Use Changing settings Setup menu
Certification Logo (For some models only)
Displays some of the certification logos for this product.
1. MENU → (Setup) → [Certification Logo].
[214] How to Use Changing settings Setup menu
Setting Reset
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Resets the product to the default settings. Even if you perform [Setting Reset], the recorded
images are retained.
1. MENU → (Setup) → [Setting Reset] → desired setting.
Menu item details
Camera Settings Reset:
Initializes the main shooting settings to the default settings.
Initialize:
Initializes all the settings to the default settings.
Note
Be sure not to eject the battery pack while resetting.
When you perform [Initialize], downloaded applications on the product may be uninstalled.
To use these applications again, re-install them.
[215] How to Use Using Wi-Fi functions Connecting this product and a Smartphone
PlayMemories Mobile
To use [Smart Remote Embedded] or [Send to Smartphone], etc., the application
PlayMemories Mobile should be installed on your smartphone.
Download and install the application PlayMemories Mobile from your smartphone’s
application store. If PlayMemories Mobile is already installed on your smartphone, be sure to
update it to the latest version.
For details on PlayMemories Mobile, refer to the support page (http://www.sony.net/pmm/).
[216] How to Use Using Wi-Fi functions Connecting this product and a Smartphone
Connecting an Android smartphone to this product
1. Launch PlayMemories Mobile on your smartphone.
2. Select the model name of this product (DIRECT-xxxx: xxxx).
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
3. Input the password that is displayed on this product.
The smartphone is connected to the product.
[217] How to Use Using Wi-Fi functions Connecting this product and a Smartphone
Connecting the product to an iPhone or iPad
1. Select the model name of this product (DIRECT-xxxx: xxxx) on the Wi-Fi setting screen
of your iPhone or iPad.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
2. Input the password displayed on this product.
The iPhone or iPad is connected to the product.
3. Confirm that your iPhone or iPad was connected to the “SSID” shown on this product.
4. Return to the “Home” screen and launch PlayMemories Mobile.
[218] How to Use Using Wi-Fi functions Connecting this product and a Smartphone
Calling up an application using [One-touch(NFC)]
You can call up a desired application from the application menu of this product by touching
an NFC-enabled Android smartphone to the product. If the application you call up has a
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
feature that works with the smartphone, the product and the smartphone will be connected
via Wi-Fi. To use this function, register the desired application in advance.
1. MENU → (Wireless) → [One-touch(NFC)] → desired application.
2. Switch this product to shooting mode, then touch an NFC-enabled smartphone to the
(N mark) on the product for 1-2 seconds.
PlayMemories Mobile launches on the smartphone, and the application you have
registered launches on this product.
Note
When the product is in playback mode, the registered application will not launch even if
you touch the smartphone to the product.
When you call up an application with one touch, even if that application does not work with
a smartphone, PlayMemories Mobile on smartphone will launch. Exit PlayMemories
Mobile without performing an operation. If you do not exit PlayMemories Mobile, the
smartphone stays in standby connection status.
[Smart Remote Embedded] is assigned to [One-touch(NFC)] as a default setting.
[219] How to Use Using Wi-Fi functions Controlling this product using a Smartphone
Smart Remote Embedded
You can use a smartphone as the remote controller for this product, and shoot still
images/movies. The application PlayMemories Mobile must be installed on your smartphone.
1. MENU → (Application) → [Application List] → [Smart Remote Embedded].
2. When the product is ready for the connection, an information screen appears on the
product. Connect the smartphone and the product using that information.
Connection setting methods differ among smartphones.
3. Check the composition of the image on the smartphone screen, and then press the
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
shutter button (A) on the smartphone to shoot an image.
Use button (B) to change settings such as [EV], [Self-Timer] and [Review Check].
Note
When you record movies using a smartphone as a remote controller, the monitor of the
product becomes darker. Also, you cannot use the viewfinder for still image/movie
recording.
This product shares the connection information for [Smart Remote Embedded] with a
device that has permission to connect. If you want to change the device that is permitted
to connect to the product, reset the connection information by following these steps.
MENU → (Wireless) → [SSID/PW Reset]. After resetting the connection information,
you must register the smartphone again.
Depending on future version upgrades, the operational procedures or screen displays are
subject to change without notice.
[220] How to Use Using Wi-Fi functions Controlling this product using a Smartphone
One-touch connection with an NFC-enabled Android
smartphone (NFC One-touch remote)
You can connect this product and an NFC-enabled Android smartphone with one touch,
without performing a complex setup operation.
1. Activate the NFC function of the smartphone.
2. Switch this product to shooting mode.
The NFC function is available only when the (N mark) is displayed on the
screen.
3. Touch the product to the smartphone.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
The smartphone and the product are connected, and PlayMemories Mobile launches
on the smartphone.
Touch the smartphone to the product for 1-2 seconds until PlayMemories Mobile
launches.
About “NFC”
NFC is a technology that enables short-range wireless communication between various
devices, such as mobile phones or IC tags, etc. NFC makes data communication simpler
with just a touch on the designated touch-point.
NFC (Near Field Communication) is an international standard of short-range wireless
communication technology.
Note
If you cannot make a connection, do as the following:
Launch PlayMemories Mobile on your smartphone, and then move the smartphone slowly toward
the (N mark) of this product.
If the smartphone is in a case, remove it.
If the product is in a case, remove it.
Check whether the NFC function is activated on your smartphone.
When [Airplane Mode] is set to [On], you cannot connect this product and the
smartphone. Set [Airplane Mode] to [Off].
If this product and the smartphone are connected when the product is in playback mode,
the displayed image is sent to the smartphone.
[221] How to Use Using Wi-Fi functions Transferring images to a Smartphone
Send to Smartphone
You can transfer still images/movies to a smartphone and view them. The application
PlayMemories Mobile must be installed on your smartphone.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
1. MENU → (Wireless) → [Send to Smartphone] → desired setting.
If you press the (Send to Smartphone) button in playback mode, the setting
screen for [Send to Smartphone] will appear.
2. If the product is ready for the transfer, the information screen appears on the product.
Connect the smartphone and the product using that information.
The setting method for connecting the smartphone and the product varies depending
on the smartphone.
Menu item details
Select on This Device:
Selects an image on the product to be transferred to the smartphone.
(1) Select from among [This Image], [All Images on This Date] or [Multiple Images].
The options displayed may differ depending on the View Mode selected on the camera.
(2) If you select [Multiple Images], select the desired images using on the control wheel,
then press MENU → [Enter].
Select on Smartphone:
Displays all images recorded on the product’s memory card on the smartphone.
Note
You can only transfer images that are saved on the camera's memory card.
You can select an image size to be sent to the smartphone from [Original], [2M] or [VGA].
To change the image size, refer to the following steps.
For Android smartphone
Start PlayMemories Mobile, and change the image size by [Settings] → [Copy Image Size].
For iPhone/iPad
Select PlayMemories Mobile in the setting menu, and change the image size by [Copy Image
Size].
Some images may not be displayed on the smartphone depending on the recording
format.
RAW images are converted to JPEG format when they are sent.
You cannot send XAVC S or AVCHD format movies.
This product shares the connection information for [Send to Smartphone] with a device
that has permission to connect. If you want to change the device that is permitted to
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
connect to the product, reset the connection information by following these steps. MENU
→ [Wireless] → [SSID/PW Reset]. After resetting the connection information, you must
register the smartphone again.
When [Airplane Mode] is set to [On], you cannot connect this product and the
smartphone. Set [Airplane Mode] to [Off].
[222] How to Use Using Wi-Fi functions Transferring images to a Smartphone
Sending images to an Android smartphone (NFC One-
touch Sharing)
With just one touch, you can connect this product and an NFC-enabled Android smartphone,
and send an image displayed on the product screen directly to the smartphone. For movies,
you can only transfer MP4 movies recorded with [File Format] set to [MP4].
1. Activate the NFC function of the smartphone.
2. Display a single image on the product.
3. Touch the smartphone to the product.
The product and the smartphone are connected, and PlayMemories Mobile
automatically launches on the smartphone, and then the displayed image is sent to the
smartphone.
Before you touch the smartphone, cancel the sleep and lock-screen functions of the
smartphone.
The NFC function is available only when the (N mark) is displayed on the
product.
Touch the smartphone to the product for 1-2 seconds until PlayMemories Mobile
launches.
To transfer two or more images, select MENU → (Wireless) → [Send to
Smartphone] to select images. After the connection enabled screen appears, use
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
NFC to connect the product and the smartphone.
About “NFC”
NFC is a technology that enables short-range wireless communication between various
devices, such as mobile phones or IC tags, etc. NFC makes data communication simpler
with just a touch on the designated touch-point.
NFC (Near Field Communication) is an international standard of short-range wireless
communication technology.
Note
You can select an image size to be sent to the smartphone from [Original], [2M], or
[VGA].
To change the image size, refer to the following steps.
For Android smartphone
Start PlayMemories Mobile, and change the image size by [Settings] → [Copy Image Size].
RAW images are converted to JPEG format when they are sent.
If the Image Index is displayed on the product, you cannot transfer images using the NFC
function.
If you cannot make a connection, perform the following:
Launch PlayMemories Mobile on your smartphone, and then move the smartphone slowly toward
the (N mark) of this product.
If the smartphone is in a case, remove it.
If the product is in a case, remove it.
Confirm that the NFC function is activated on the smartphone.
When [Airplane Mode] is set to [On], you cannot connect the product and the
smartphone. Set [Airplane Mode] to [Off].
You cannot send AVCHD format movies.
You cannot send XAVC S format movies.
When you save images to a Mac computer using the Wi-Fi function, use “Wireless Auto
Import.”
[223] How to Use Using Wi-Fi functions Transferring images to a computer
Send to Computer
You can transfer images stored in the product to a computer connected to a wireless access
point or wireless broadband router and easily make backup copies using this operation.
Before starting this operation, install PlayMemories Home on your computer and register the
access point on the product.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
1. Start your computer.
2. MENU → (Wireless) → [Send to Computer].
Note
Depending on the application settings of your computer, the product will turn off after
saving the images to your computer.
You can transfer images from the product to only one computer at a time.
If you want to transfer images to another computer, connect the product and the computer
via a USB connection and follow the instructions in PlayMemories Home.
When you save images to the MAC computer using Wi-Fi function, use "Wireless Auto
Import."
[224] How to Use Using Wi-Fi functions Transferring images to a TV
View on TV
You can view images on a network-enabled TV by transferring them from the product without
connecting the product and TV with a cable. For some TVs, you may need to perform
operations on the TV. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the TV.
1. MENU → (Wireless) → [View on TV] → desired device to be connected.
2. When you want to play back images using slideshow, press on the center of the
control wheel.
To display the next/previous image manually, press the right/left side of the control
wheel.
To change the device to be connected, press the bottom side of the control wheel,
then select [Device list].
Slideshow settings
You can change the slideshow settings by pressing the bottom side of the control wheel.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Playback Selection:
Selects the group of images to be shown.
Folder View(Still):
Selects from [All] and [All in Folder].
Date View:
Selects from [All] and [All in Date Rng.].
Interval:
Selects from [Short] and [Long].
Effects*:
Select from [On] and [Off].
Playback Image Size:
Select from [HD] and [4K].
*The settings are effective only for BRAVIA TV which is compatible with the functions.
Note
You can use this function on a TV that supports DLNA renderer.
You can view images on a Wi-Fi Direct-enabled TV or network-enabled TV (including
wired network-enabled TVs).
If you connect TV and this product and do not use Wi-Fi Direct, you need to register your
access point first.
Displaying the images on the TV may take time.
Movies cannot be shown on a TV via Wi-Fi. Use an HDMI cable (sold separately).
[225] How to Use Using Wi-Fi functions Changing the settings of Wi-Fi functions
Airplane Mode
When you board an airplane, etc., you can temporarily disable all the wireless-related
functions including Wi-Fi.
1. MENU → (Wireless) → [Airplane Mode] → desired setting.
If you set [Airplane Mode] to [On], an airplane mark will be displayed on the screen.
[226] How to Use Using Wi-Fi functions Changing the settings of Wi-Fi functions
WPS Push
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
If your access point has the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button, you can register the
access point to this product easily by pushing the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button.
1. MENU → (Wireless) → [WPS Push].
2. Press the WPS button on the access point you want to register.
Note
[WPS Push] works only if the security setting of your access point is set to WPA or WPA2
and your access point supports the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button method. If the
security setting is set to WEP or your access point does not support the Wi-Fi Protected
Setup (WPS) button method, perform [Access Point Set.].
For details about the available functions and settings of your access point, see the access
point operating instructions or contact the administrator of the access point.
A connection may not be enabled depending on the surrounding conditions, such as the
type of wall material or if there is an obstruction or poor wireless signal between the
product and access point. If that happens, change the location of the product or move the
product closer to the access point.
[227] How to Use Using Wi-Fi functions Changing the settings of Wi-Fi functions
Access Point Set.
You can register your access point manually. Before starting the procedure, check the SSID
name of the access point, security system, and password. The password may be preset in
some devices. For details, see the access point operating instructions, or consult the access
point administrator.
1. MENU → (Wireless) → [Access Point Set.].
2. Select the access point you want to register.
When the desired access point is displayed on the screen: Select the desired
access point.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
When the desired access point is not displayed on the screen: Select [Manual
Setting] and set the access point.
*For the input method, refer to “How to use the keyboard.”
If you select [Manual Setting], input the SSID name of the access point, then select
the security system.
3. Input the password, and select [OK].
Access points without the mark do not require a password.
4. Select [OK].
How to use the keyboard
When manual character entry is required, a keyboard is displayed on the screen.
1. Input box
The characters you entered are displayed.
2. Switch character types
Each time you press in the center of the control wheel, the character type will
switch between alphabet letters, numerals and symbols.
3. Keyboard
Each time you press in the center, the characters corresponding to that key will be
displayed one-by-one in order.
For example: If you want to enter “abd”
Select the key for “abc” and press once to display “a” → select “ ”((5) Move
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
cursor) and press → select the key for “abc” and press twice to display “b” →
select the key for “def” and press once to display “d”.
4. Finalize
Finalizes the entered characters.
5. Move cursor
Moves the cursor in the input box to the right or left.
6. Delete
Deletes the character preceding the cursor.
7.
Switches the next character to a capital or lowercase letter.
8.
Enters a space.
To cancel input, select [Cancel].
Other setting items
Depending on the status or the setting method of your access point, you may want to set
more items.
WPS PIN:
Displays the PIN code you enter into the connected device.
Priority Connection:
Select [On] or [Off].
IP Address Setting:
Select [Auto] or [Manual].
IP Address:
If you are entering the IP address manually, enter the set address.
Subnet Mask/Default Gateway:
When you set [IP Address Setting] to [Manual], enter the IP address to match your network
environment.
Note
To give the registered access point priority, set [Priority Connection] to [On].
[228] How to Use Using Wi-Fi functions Changing the settings of Wi-Fi functions
Edit Device Name
You can change the device name under Wi-Fi Direct.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
1. MENU → (Wireless) → [Edit Device Name].
2. Select the input box, then input the device name → [OK].
For input method, refer to “How to use the keyboard.”
[229] How to Use Using Wi-Fi functions Changing the settings of Wi-Fi functions
Disp MAC Address
Displays the MAC address of this product.
1. MENU →(Wireless) → [Disp MAC Address].
[230] How to Use Using Wi-Fi functions Changing the settings of Wi-Fi functions
SSID/PW Reset
This product shares the connection information for [Send to Smartphone] and [Smart
Remote Embedded] with a device that has permission to connect. If you want to change the
device that is permitted to connect, reset the connection information.
1. MENU → (Wireless) → [SSID/PW Reset] → [OK].
Note
If you connect this product to the smartphone after resetting the connection information,
you must register the smartphone again.
[231] How to Use Using Wi-Fi functions Changing the settings of Wi-Fi functions
Reset Network Set.
Resets all the network settings to default settings.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
1. MENU → (Wireless) → [Reset Network Set.] → [OK].
[232] How to Use Adding applications to the product PlayMemories Camera Apps
PlayMemories Camera Apps
You can add the desired functions to this product by connecting to the application download
website (PlayMemories Camera Apps) via the Internet.
Press MENU → (Application) → [Introduction] for information about the service and
available countries and regions.
[233] How to Use Adding applications to the product PlayMemories Camera Apps
Recommended computer environment
For details on the recommended computer environments for downloading an application and
adding functions to the product, refer to the following URL:
“PlayMemories Camera Apps” website (http://www.sony.net/pmca/)
[234] How to Use Adding applications to the product Installing the applications
Opening a service account
You can open a service account, which is required to download applications.
1. Access the application download website.
http://www.sony.net/pmca/
2. Follow the instructions on the screen and acquire a service account.
Follow the instructions on the screen to download the desired application to the
product.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
[235] How to Use Adding applications to the product Installing the applications
Downloading applications
You can download applications using your computer.
1. Access the application downloading website.
http://www.sony.net/pmca/
2. Select the desired application and download the application to the product following the
instructions on the screen.
Connect the computer and the product using the micro USB cable (supplied),
following the instructions on the screen.
[236] How to Use Adding applications to the product Installing the applications
Downloading applications directly to the product using
the Wi-Fi function
You can download applications using the Wi-Fi function without connecting to a computer.
Acquire a service account in advance.
1. MENU → (Application) → [Application List] → (PlayMemories Camera Apps),
then follow the instructions on the screen to download applications.
Note
If MENU → (Wireless) → [Access Point Set.] → access point to be connected → [IP
Address Setting] is set to [Manual], change the setting to [Auto].
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
[237] How to Use Adding applications to the product Starting the applications
Launching the downloaded application
Launch an application that has been downloaded from the application download website
PlayMemories Camera Apps.
1. MENU → (Application) → [Application List] → desired application to launch.
Hint
How to launch the applications faster
Assign [Download Appli.] and [Application List] to the custom key. You can launch the
applications or display application list only by pressing the custom key during the shooting
information screen is displayed.
[238] How to Use Adding applications to the product Managing the applications
Uninstalling applications
You can uninstall applications from this product.
1. MENU → (Application) → [Application List] → [Application Management] →
[Manage and Remove].
2. Select the application to be uninstalled.
3. Select to uninstall the application.
The uninstalled application can be re-installed. For details, see the application download
website.
[239] How to Use Adding applications to the product Managing the applications
Changing the order of applications
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
You can change the order in which added applications are displayed on this product.
1. MENU →(Application) → [Application List] → [Application Management] → [Sort].
2. Select the application of which you want to change the order.
3. Select the destination.
[240] How to Use Adding applications to the product Managing the applications
Confirming the account information of PlayMemories
Camera Apps
The account information for the “Sony Entertainment Network” that is registered on the
product is displayed.
1. MENU → (Application) → [Application List] → [Application Management] → [Display
Account Information].
[241] How to Use Using a computer Recommended computer environment
Recommended computer environment
You can confirm the operating computer environment of the software from the following
URL:
http://www.sony.net/pcenv/
[242] How to Use Using a computer Using the software
PlayMemories Home
With PlayMemories Home, you can do the following:
You can import images shot with this product to your computer.
You can play back the images imported to your computer.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
You can share your images using PlayMemories Online.
Also for Windows, you can do the following:
You can organize images on the computer on a calendar by shooting date to view them.
You can edit and correct images, such as by trimming and resizing.
You can create a disc from movies imported to a computer. Blu-ray discs or AVCHD discs
can be created from XAVC S-format movies.
You can upload images to a network service. (An internet connection is required.)
For other details, please refer to the Help of PlayMemories Home.
[243] How to Use Using a computer Using the software
Installing PlayMemories Home
1. Using your computer's Internet browser, go to the URL below and download
PlayMemories Home by following the on-screen instructions.
http://www.sony.net/pm/
An internet connection is required.
For detailed instructions, visit the PlayMemories Home support page.
http://www.sony.co.jp/pmh-se/
2. Connect the product to your computer using the micro USB cable (supplied), then turn
the product on.
New functions may be added to PlayMemories Home. Even if PlayMemories Home
has already been installed on your computer, connect this product and your
computer again.
Do not remove the micro USB cable (supplied) from the camera while the camera is
in operation or the access screen is displayed. Doing so may damage the data.
A: To the Multi/Micro USB Terminal
B: To the USB jack of the computer
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Note
Log on as Administrator.
It may be necessary to restart your computer. When the restart confirmation message
appears, restart the computer following the instructions on the screen.
DirectX may be installed depending on your computer’s system environment.
Hint
For details on PlayMemories Home, refer to the Help of PlayMemories Home or the
PlayMemories Home support page (http://www.sony.co.jp/pmh-se/) (English only).
[244] How to Use Using a computer Using the software
Software for Mac computers
For details on software for Mac computers, access the following URL:
http://www.sony.co.jp/imsoft/Mac/
Wireless Auto Import
“Wireless Auto Import” is required if you are using a Mac computer and want to import
images to the computer using Wi-Fi function. Download “Wireless Auto Import” from the URL
above, and install it on your Mac computer. For details, see Help for “Wireless Auto Import.”
Note
The software that can be used varies depending on the region.
[245] How to Use Using a computer Using the software
Image Data Converter
With Image Data Converter, you can do the following:
You can play back and edit images recorded in RAW format with various corrections,
such as tone curve and sharpness.
You can adjust images with white balance, exposure, and [Creative Style], etc.
You can save the still images displayed and edited on a computer.
You can either save the still image as RAW format or save it in the general file format.
You can display and compare the RAW images and JPEG images recorded by this
product.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
You can rank images in five grades.
You can apply color labels.
[246] How to Use Using a computer Using the software
Installing Image Data Converter
1. Download and install the software by accessing the following URL (English only).
http://www.sony.co.jp/ids-se/
Note
Log on as Administrator.
[247] How to Use Using a computer Using the software
Accessing Image Data Converter Guide
Windows:
[Start] → [All Programs] → [Image Data Converter] → [Help] → [Image Data Converter].
For Windows 8, start [Image Data Converter], and select [Help] from the menu bar →
[Image Data Converter Guide].
Mac:
Finder → [Applications] → [Image Data Converter] → [Image Data Converter], and select
[Help] from the menu bar → [Image Data Converter Guide].
Hint
For details on operation, you can also refer to the Image Data Converter support page
(English only).
http://www.sony.co.jp/ids-se/
[248] How to Use Using a computer Using the software
Remote Camera Control
When using Remote Camera Control, the following operations are available on your
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
computer.
Changing this product’s settings and shooting.
Recording images directly to the computer.
Performing interval timer shooting.
Use these functions after selecting MENU → (Setup) → [USB Connection] → [PC
Remote]. For details on how to use Remote Camera Control, refer to the Help.
[249] How to Use Using a computer Using the software
Installing Remote Camera Control
Download and install the software by accessing the following URL:
Windows:
http://www.sony.co.jp/imsoft/Win/
Mac:
http://www.sony.co.jp/imsoft/Mac/
[250] How to Use Using a computer Using the software
Accessing the Help of Remote Camera Control
Windows:
[Start] → [All Programs] → [Remote Camera Control] → [Remote Camera Control Help].
For Windows 8, start [Remote Camera Control], and right-click the title bar to select
[Remote Camera Control Help].
Mac:
Finder → [Applications] → [Remote Camera Control], and select [Help] from the menu bar →
[Remote Camera Control Help].
[251] How to Use Using a computer Connecting this product and a computer
Connecting the product to a computer
1. Insert a sufficiently charged battery pack into the product, or connect it to a wall outlet
(wall socket) using an AC Adaptor AC-PW20 (sold separately).
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
2. Turn on the product and the computer.
3. Check from (Setup) that [USB Connection] is set to [Mass Storage].
4. Connect the product and your computer using the micro USB cable (supplied) (A) .
If you connect the product to your computer using the micro USB cable when [USB
Power Supply] is set to [On], power is supplied from your computer. (Default setting:
[On])
[252] How to Use Using a computer Connecting this product and a computer
Importing images to the computer
PlayMemories Home allows you to easily import images. For details on PlayMemories Home
functions, see the Help of PlayMemories Home.
Importing images to the computer without using PlayMemories Home
(For Windows)
When the AutoPlay Wizard appears after making a USB connection between this product
and a computer, click [Open folder to view files] → [OK] → [DCIM] or [MP_ROOT]. Then
copy the desired images to the computer.
If Device Stage appears on a Windows 7 or Windows 8 computer, double-click [Browse
Files] → media icon → folder in which the images you want to import are stored.
Importing images to the computer without using PlayMemories Home
(For Mac)
Connect the product to your Mac computer. Double-click the newly recognized icon on the
desktop → the folder in which the image you want to import is stored. Then drag and drop
the image file on to the hard disk icon.
Note
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
For operations such as importing XAVC S movies or AVCHD movies to the computer, use
PlayMemories Home.
Do not edit or otherwise process AVCHD movie files/folders from the connected
computer. Movie files may be damaged or become unplayable. Do not delete or copy
AVCHD movies on the memory card from the computer. Sony is not held liable for
consequences resulting from such operations via the computer.
[253] How to Use Using a computer Connecting this product and a computer
Disconnecting the product from the computer
Disconnects the USB connection between this product and the computer.
Perform the procedures from step 1 to 2 below before performing the following operations:
Disconnecting the USB cable.
Removing a memory card.
Turning off the product.
1. Click (Safely remove USB Mass Storage Device) on the taskbar.
2. Click the displayed message.
Note
For Mac computers, drag and drop the icon of the memory card or the drive icon in the
“Trash” icon. The product is disconnected from the computer.
For Windows 7/Windows 8 computers, the disconnect icon may not appear. In that case,
you can skip steps 1 and 2 above.
Do not remove a micro USB cable from this product while the access lamp is illuminated.
The data may be damaged.
[254] How to Use Using a computer Creating a movie disc
Selecting a disc to be created
You can create a disc that can be played back on other devices from a movie recorded on
this camera.
What devices can play back the disc depends on the disc type. Select a disc type suitable
for the playback devices you will be using.
Depending on the movie type, the movie format may be converted when creating a disc.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
High-definition image quality (HD) (Blu-ray Disc)
High-definition image quality (HD) movies can be recorded on a Blu-ray Disc, creating a
high-definition image quality (HD) disc. A Blu-ray Disc enables you to record longer-duration
high-definition image quality (HD) movies than DVD discs.
Writable movie formats: XAVC S, AVCHD, MP4 (AVC)
Players: Blu-ray Disc playback devices (Sony Blu-ray Disc players, PlayStation 3, etc.)
High-definition image quality (HD) (AVCHD recording disc)
High-definition image quality (HD) movies can be recorded on DVD media such as DVD-R
discs, creating a high-definition image quality (HD) disc.
Writable movie formats: XAVC S, AVCHD, MP4 (AVC)
Players: AVCHD format playback devices (Sony Blu-ray Disc players, PlayStation 3, etc.)
You cannot play these kinds of discs on ordinary DVD players.
Standard definition image quality (STD)
Standard definition image quality (STD) movies converted from high-definition image quality
(HD) movies can be recorded on DVD media such as DVD-R discs, creating a standard
image quality (STD) disc.
Writable movie format: AVCHD
Players: Ordinary DVD playback devices (DVD players, computers that can play back DVD
discs, etc.)
Hint
You can use the following types of 12 cm discs with PlayMemories Home.
BD-R*/ DVD-R/DVD+R/DVD+R DL: Non-rewritable
BD-RE*/DVD-RW/DVD+RW: Rewritable
*Additional recording is not possible.
Always maintain your “PlayStation 3” to use the latest version of the “PlayStation 3”
system software.
[255] How to Use Using a computer Creating a movie disc
Creating Blu-ray Discs from high-definition image quality
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
movies
You can create Blu-ray Discs that can be played back on Blu-ray Disc playback devices
(such as Sony Blu-ray Disc players or the PlayStation 3, etc.).
A. How to create using a computer
With a Windows computer, you can copy movies imported to the computer and create Blu-
ray Discs using PlayMemories Home.
Your computer must be able to create Blu-ray Discs.
When you create a Blu-ray Disc for the first time, connect your camera to the computer
using a USB cable. The necessary software is automatically added to your computer. (An
internet connection is needed.)
For details on how to create a disc using PlayMemories Home, refer to the Help guide for
PlayMemories Home.
B. How to create using a device other than a computer
You can also create Blu-ray Discs using a Blu-ray recorder, etc.
For details, refer to the device's operating instructions.
Note
When creating Blu-ray discs using PlayMemories Home from movies recorded in the
XAVC S or MP4 movie formats, the image quality is converted to 1920×1080 (60i/50i) and
it is not possible to create discs with the original image quality. To record movies with the
original image quality, copy movies to a computer or an external medium.
To create a Blu-ray Disc from movies recorded in the AVCHD movie format with [
Record Setting] set to [60p 28M(PS)]/[50p 28M(PS)], you need to use a device that is
compliant with AVCHD format Ver. 2.0. The created Blu-ray Disc can be played back only
on a device that is compliant with AVCHD format Ver. 2.0.
[256] How to Use Using a computer Creating a movie disc
Creating DVD discs (AVCHD recording discs) from high-
definition image quality movies
You can create DVD discs (AVCHD recording discs) that can be played back on AVCHD-
compatible playback devices (such as Sony Blu-ray Disc players or the PlayStation 3, etc.).
A. How to create using a computer
With a Windows computer, you can copy movies imported to the computer and create DVD
discs (AVCHD recording discs) using PlayMemories Home.
Your computer must be able to create DVD discs (AVCHD recording discs).
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
When you create a DVD disc for the first time, connect your camera to the computer using a
USB cable. The necessary software is automatically added to your computer. (An internet
connection is needed.)
For details on how to create a disc using PlayMemories Home, refer to the Help guide for
PlayMemories Home.
B. How to create using a device other than a computer
You can also create DVD discs (AVCHD recording discs) using a Blu-ray recorder, etc.
For details, refer to the device's operating instructions.
Note
When creating DVD discs (AVCHD recording discs) using PlayMemories Home from
movies recorded in the XAVC S or MP4 movie formats, the image quality is converted to
1920×1080 (60i/50i) and it is not possible to create discs with the original image quality.
To record movies with the original image quality, copy movies to a computer or an
external medium.
When creating AVCHD recording discs using PlayMemories Home from movies recorded
in the AVCHD movie format with [Record Setting] set to [60p 28M(PS)]/[50p
28M(PS)], [60i 24M(FX)]/[50i 24M(FX)] or [24p 24M(FX)]/[25p 24M(FX)], the image
quality is converted and it is not possible to create discs with the original image quality.
Converting the image quality takes time. To record movies with the original image quality,
use a Blu-ray Disc.
[257] How to Use Using a computer Creating a movie disc
Creating DVD discs from standard image quality movies
You can create DVD discs that can be played back on ordinary DVD playback devices (DVD
players, computers that can play back DVD discs, etc.).
A. How to create using a computer
With a Windows computer, you can copy movies imported to the computer and create DVD
disc using PlayMemories Home.
Your computer must be able to create DVD discs.
When you create a DVD disc for the first time, connect your camera to the computer using a
USB cable. Install the dedicated add-on software following the on-screen instructions. (An
internet connection is needed.)
For details on how to create a disc using PlayMemories Home, refer to the Help for
PlayMemories Home.
B. How to create using a device other than a computer
You can also create DVD discs using a Blu-ray recorder, HDD recorder, etc. For details,
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
refer to the device's operating instructions.
[258] How to Use Precautions/This product Precautions
Precautions
Backing up memory cards
Data may be corrupted in the following cases. Be sure to back up the data for protection.
When the memory card is removed, the USB cable is disconnected, or the product is
turned off in the middle of a read or write operation.
When the memory card is used in locations subject to static electricity or electrical noise.
Creating an image database file
If you insert a memory card that does not contain an image database file into the product and
turn on the power, the product automatically creates an image database file using some of
the memory card’s capacity. The process may take a long time and you cannot operate the
product until the process is completed.
If a database file error occurs, export all images to your computer using PlayMemories
Home, and then format the memory card using this product.
Do not use/store the product in the following places
In an extremely hot, cold or humid place
In places such as in a car parked in the sun, the camera body may become deformed and
this may cause a malfunction.
Storing under direct sunlight or near a heater
The camera body may become discolored or deformed, and this may cause a
malfunction.
In a location subject to rocking vibration
Near strong magnetic place
In sandy or dusty places
Be careful not to let sand or dust get into the product. This may cause the product to
malfunction, and in some cases this malfunction cannot be repaired.
On operating temperatures
Your product is designed for use under the temperatures between approximately 0°C and 40
°C (32 °F and 104 °F). Shooting in extremely cold or hot places that exceed this range is not
recommended.
On moisture condensation
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
If the product is brought directly from a cold to a warm location, moisture may condense
inside or outside the product. This moisture condensation may cause a malfunction of the
product.
To prevent moisture condensation when you bring the product directly from a cold to a
warm location, first put it in a plastic bag and seal it to prevent air from entering. Wait for
about an hour until the temperature of the product has reached the ambient temperature.
If moisture condensation occurs, turn off the product and wait about an hour for the
moisture to evaporate. Note that if you attempt to shoot with moisture remaining inside the
lens, you will be unable to record clear images.
On the functions available with the product
This camera is compatible with 1080 60p or 1080 50p-format movies. Unlike traditional
standard recording modes, which record using an interlacing method, this product records
movies using a progressive method. This increases the resolution, and provides a
smoother, more realistic image.
The camera is compatible with 4K 30p/4K 25p/4K 24p-format movies. You can record
movies in higher quality.
Notes for when on board an airplane
In an airplane, set [Airplane Mode] to [On].
On image data compatibility
This product conforms with DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) universal standard
established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries
Association).
Playback of images recorded with your product on other equipment and playback of
images recorded or edited with other equipment on your product are not guaranteed.
Notes on playing movies on other devices
Movies recorded by your camera may not be playable properly on other devices. Also,
movies recorded by devices other than your camera may not be able to playback on your
camera.
Discs of AVCHD movies recorded by your camera can only be played back on devices
supporting AVCHD format.
DVD players and DVD recorders do not support AVCHD format, so they cannot playback
AVCHD movie discs.
Also, if a high definition image quality (HD) disc recorded with AVCHD format is inserted
in either of DVD players or DVD recorders, the disc may be unable to eject from the
device.
Movies recorded in 1080 60p/1080 50p format can be played back only on 1080 60p/1080
50p supported devices.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
XAVC S movies can be played back only on XAVC S-supported devices.
On the monitor, viewfinder, and lens
The monitor and viewfinder are manufactured using extremely high-precision technology
so over 99.99 % of the pixels are operational for effective use. However, there may be
some tiny black points and/or bright points (white, red, blue or green in color) that
consistently appear on the monitor and the viewfinder. These points are normal in the
manufacturing process and do not affect the images in any way.
Exposing the monitor or lens to direct sunlight for long periods may cause a malfunction.
Exercise caution when placing the product near a window or outdoors.
Do not press against the monitor. The monitor may be discolored and that may cause a
malfunction.
Images may trail across on the monitor in a cold location. This is not a malfunction.
If the monitor has drops of water or other liquids on it, wipe it with a soft cloth. If the
monitor stays wet, the surface of the monitor may change or deteriorate. This may cause
a malfunction.
When the battery pack is discharged, the product may shut off while the lens is still
extended. Insert a charged battery pack, then turn the product on again.
Make sure not to bump the lens or subject it to force.
Do not carry the camera by the monitor.
When the lens is in operation, be careful not to catch your fingers or any other objects in
the lens.
Do not expose the camera to sunlight or shoot sunward for a long time. The internal
mechanism may be damaged.
Do not use the camera in areas where strong radio waves or radiation is being emitted.
Recording and playback may not function correctly.
Shooting with the viewfinder
When looking through the viewfinder, you may experience symptoms such as eye
soreness, fatigue, or nausea similar to car-sickness. We recommend that you take
periodic breaks when shooting with the viewfinder. Determine the necessary length and
frequency of breaks on your own, as these will vary from individual to individual. If
unpleasant symptoms occur, stop using the viewfinder until they resolve, and consult your
doctor if necessary.
Notes on the flash
Do not cover the flash with your fingers.
Do not carry the product by the flash unit, or use excessive strength on it.
If water, dust or sand get into the open flash unit, it may cause a malfunction.
When pushing down the flash unit, be careful not to catch your fingers.
Notes on discarding or transferring this product to others
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
When discarding or transferring this product to others, make sure to perform the following
operation to protect private information.
Perform [Setting Reset] to reset all the settings.
[259] How to Use Precautions/This product Precautions
On the internal rechargeable battery
This camera has an internal rechargeable battery for maintaining the date and time and
other settings regardless of whether the power is on or off, or whether the battery pack is
charged or discharged. This rechargeable battery is continually charged as long as you are
using the product. However, if you use the product for only short periods, it gradually
discharges. If you do not use the product at all for about 1 month(s) it becomes completely
discharged. In this case, be sure to charge this rechargeable battery before using the
product. However, even if this rechargeable battery is not charged, you can still use the
product as long as you do not record the date and time.
Charging method of the internal rechargeable battery
Insert a charged battery pack into the product, or connect the product to a wall outlet (wall
socket) using the AC Adaptor (supplied), and leave the product for 24 hours or more with the
power off.
[260] How to Use Precautions/This product Precautions
Notes on the battery pack
Charging the battery pack
Charge the battery pack (supplied) before using the product for the first time.
The charged battery pack will discharge little by little even if you do not use it. Charge the
battery pack each time before you use the product so that you do not miss any
opportunities to shoot images.
You can charge the battery pack even if it is not completely discharged. You can use a
partially charged battery pack.
If the charge lamp flashes when the battery pack is not fully charged, remove the battery
pack or disconnect the USB cable from the camera and then reinsert it to recharge.
We recommend charging the battery pack in an ambient temperature of between 10 °C
and 30 °C (50 °F and 86 °F). The battery pack may not be effectively charged in
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
temperatures outside this range.
When you connect this product and a laptop computer that is not connected to a power
source, the laptop’s battery charge may decrease. Do not charge this product using the
laptop computer for too long.
Do not turn on/restart a computer, wake a computer from sleep mode, or turn off a
computer while this product is connected to the computer via USB cable. Doing so may
cause a malfunction of this product. Disconnect the product and the computer before
performing the above operations.
We do not guarantee charging if you are using a self-built or modified computer.
Charging time (Full charge)
The charging time is approximately 310 minutes using the AC adaptor (supplied). The above
charging time applies when charging a fully depleted battery pack at a temperature of 25 °C
(77 °F). Charging may take longer depending on conditions of use and circumstances.
Effective use of the battery pack
Battery performance decreases in low temperature environments. So in cold places, the
operational time of the battery pack is shorter. To ensure longer battery pack use, we
recommend putting the battery pack in your pocket close to your body to warm it up, and
insert it in the product immediately before you start shooting. If there are any metal
objects such as keys in your pocket, be careful of causing a short-circuit.
The battery pack will run down quickly if you use the flash or continuous shooting function
frequently, turn the power on/off frequently, or set the monitor very bright.
We recommend preparing spare battery packs and taking trial shots before taking the
actual shots.
Do not expose the battery pack to water. The battery pack is not water-resistant.
Do not leave the battery pack in extremely hot places, such as in a car or under direct
sunlight.
If the battery terminal is dirty, you may not be able to turn on the product or the battery
pack may not be properly charged. In that case, clean the battery by lightly wiping off any
dust using a soft cloth or a cotton swab.
Remaining battery indicator
The remaining battery indicator appears on the screen.
A: Battery level high
B: Battery exhausted
It takes about one minute for the correct remaining battery indicator to appear.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
The correct remaining battery indicator may not be displayed under some operating or
environmental conditions.
If the remaining battery time does not appear on the screen, press the DISP (Display
Setting) button to display it.
How to store the battery pack
To maintain the battery pack’s function, charge the battery pack and then fully discharge it
in the product at least once a year before storing it. Remove the battery pack from the
camera and store the battery in a cool, dry place.
To use the battery pack up, leave the product in slide show playback mode until the
power goes off.
To prevent staining the terminal, short-circuiting, etc., be sure to use a plastic bag to keep
away from metal materials when carrying or storing the battery pack.
On battery life
The battery life is limited. If you use the same battery repeatedly, or use the same battery
for a long period, the battery capacity decreases gradually. If the available time of the
battery is shortened significantly, it is probably time to replace the battery pack with a new
one.
The battery life varies according to how the battery pack is stored and the operating
conditions and environment in which each battery pack is used.
[261] How to Use Precautions/This product Precautions
Charging the battery pack
The supplied AC Adaptor is dedicated to this product. Do not connect with other
electronic devices. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
Make sure to use a genuine Sony AC Adaptor.
If the product's charge lamp flashes while charging, remove the battery pack being
charged, and then insert the same battery pack firmly back into the product. If the charge
lamp flashes again, this may indicate a faulty battery or that a battery pack other than the
specified type has been inserted. Check that the battery pack is the specified type.
If the battery pack is the specified type, remove the battery pack, replace it with a new or
different one and check that the newly inserted battery is charging correctly. If the newly
inserted battery is charging correctly, the previously inserted battery may be faulty.
If the charge lamp flashes even if the AC Adaptor is connected to the product and the wall
outlet (wall socket), this indicates that charging has stopped temporarily and is on
standby. Charging stops and enters standby status automatically when the temperature is
outside of the recommended operating temperature. When the temperature returns to the
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
appropriate range, charging resumes and the charge lamp lights up again. We
recommend charging the battery pack in an ambient temperature of between 10°C to
30°C (50°F to 86°F).
[262] How to Use Precautions/This product Precautions
Notes on memory card
If you repeatedly shoot and delete images for a long time, fragmentation of data in a file in
the memory card may occur, and movie recording may be interrupted in the middle of
shooting. If this happens, save your images to a computer or other storage location, then
execute [Format].
Memory card formatted with a computer is not guaranteed to operate with the product.
Data read/write speeds differ depending on the combination of the memory card and the
equipment used.
We recommend backing up important data, such as to a hard disk of a computer.
Do not attach a label on the memory card itself nor on a memory card adaptor.
Do not touch the terminal section of the memory card with your hand or a metal object.
Do not strike, bend or drop the memory card.
Do not disassemble or modify the memory card.
Do not expose the memory card to water.
Do not leave the memory card within the reach of small children. They might accidentally
swallow it.
The memory card may be hot just after it has been used for a long time. Be careful when
you handle it.
Do not remove the battery pack or the memory card or turn the camera off while the
access lamp is illuminated. This may cause the data on the memory card to become
damaged.
If the memory card is used near areas with strong magnetization, or used in locations
subject to static electricity or electrical noise, the data on the memory card may become
damaged.
Do not insert a memory card that does not fit the memory card slot. Doing so will cause a
malfunction.
Do not use or store the memory card under the following conditions:
High temperature locations such as in a car parked under the sun
Locations exposed to direct sunlight
Humid locations or locations with corrosive substances present
To use a Memory Stick Micro media with this product, be sure to insert the Memory Stick
Micro media into an M2 Adaptor as large as Duo size. If you insert a Memory Stick Micro
media into the product without an M2 Adaptor as large as Duo size, you might not be able
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
to remove it from the product.
To use a microSD memory card with this product, be sure to insert the microSD memory
card into a dedicated adaptor.
When inserting a memory card into a memory card adaptor, be sure that the memory card
is inserted in the correct direction and then insert it as far as it will go. If the card is not
inserted properly, it may result in a malfunction.
[263] How to Use Precautions/This product Cleaning this product
On cleaning
Cleaning the lens and flash
Wipe the lens and flash with a soft cloth to remove fingerprints, dust, etc.
Cleaning the lens
Do not use a cleaning solution containing organic solvents, such as thinner, or benzine.
When cleaning the lens surface, remove dust with a commercially available blower. In
case of dust that sticks to the surface, wipe it off with a soft cloth or tissue paper slightly
moistened with lens cleaning solution. Wipe in a spiral pattern from the center to the
outside. Do not spray lens cleaning solution directly onto the lens surface.
Cleaning the flash
Clean the flash surface before use. The heat of the flash emission may cause dirt on the
flash surface to start smoking or burning. Wipe the flash surface with a soft cloth to remove
dirt or dust, etc.
Cleaning the product surface
Clean the product surface with a soft cloth slightly moistened with water, then wipe the
surface with a dry cloth. To prevent damage to the finish or casing:
Do not expose the product to chemical products such as thinner, benzine, alcohol,
disposable cloths, insect repellent, sunscreen or insecticide.
Do not touch the product with any of the above on your hand.
Do not leave the product in contact with rubber or vinyl for a long time.
Cleaning the monitor
If oil from your hand or hand cream, etc., remain on the monitor, the original coating may
become easily removable. Wipe oil or hand cream off as soon as possible.
If you wipe the monitor firmly using tissue paper, etc., the coating may be scratched.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
If the monitor becomes dirty with fingerprints or dust, gently remove the dust from the
surface, and then clean the monitor using soft cloth, etc.
[264] How to Use Precautions/This product Number of recordable still images and
recordable time of movies
Number of still images
The number of still images may vary depending on the shooting conditions and the memory
card.
[Image Size]: [L: 20M]
When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to [3:2]*
Standard
8 GB: 1150 images
16 GB: 2400 images
32 GB: 4800 images
64 GB: 9600 images
Fine
8 GB: 690 images
16 GB: 1400 images
32 GB: 2800 images
64 GB: 5500 images
Extra fine
8 GB: 510 images
16 GB: 1000 images
32 GB: 2050 images
64 GB: 4150 images
RAW & JPEG
8 GB: 235 images
16 GB: 470 images
32 GB: 950 images
64 GB: 1900 images
RAW
8 GB: 355 images
16 GB: 710 images
32 GB: 1400 images
64 GB: 2850 images
*When the [Aspect Ratio] is set to other than [3:2], you can record more pictures than shown
above. (Except when [ Quality] is set to [RAW].)
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Note
Even if the number of remaining shootable images is greater than 9,999, the “9999”
indicator appears.
When an image shot with other products is played back on this product, the image may
not appear in the actual image size.
[265] How to Use Precautions/This product Number of recordable still images and
recordable time of movies
Recordable time of movies
The table below shows the approximate maximum recording times which can be recorded on
the memory card that is formatted with this product. These numbers are the total times of all
movie files on the memory card. The recordable time may vary depending on the shooting
conditions and the memory card.
The values when [File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], [XAVC S HD], and [AVCHD] are
based on shooting with [Dual Video REC] set to [Off].
(h (hour), m (minute))
[File Format]:[XAVC S 4K]
30p 100M
25p 100M
8 GB: -
16 GB: -
32 GB: -
64 GB: 1 h 15 m
30p 60M
25p 60M
8 GB: -
16 GB: -
32 GB: -
64 GB: 2 h 5 m
24p 100M*
8 GB: -
16 GB: -
32 GB: -
64 GB: 1 h 15 m
24p 60M*
8 GB: -
16 GB: -
32 GB: -
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
64 GB: 2 h 5 m
[File Format]:[XAVC S HD]
60p 50M
50p 50M
8 GB: -
16 GB: -
32 GB: -
64 GB: 2 h 35 m
30p 50M
25p 50M
8 GB: -
16 GB: -
32 GB: -
64 GB: 2 h 35 m
24p 50M*
8 GB: -
16 GB: -
32 GB: -
64 GB: 2 h 35 m
120p 100M
100p 100M
8 GB: -
16 GB: -
32 GB: -
64 GB: 1 h 15 m
120p 60M
100p 60M
8 GB: -
16 GB: -
32 GB: -
64 GB: 2 h 5 m
[File Format]: [AVCHD]
60i 24M(FX)
50i 24M(FX)
8 GB: 40 m
16 GB: 1 h 25 m
32 GB: 3 h
64 GB: 6 h
60i 17M(FH)
50i 17M(FH)
8 GB: 55 m
16 GB: 2 h
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
32 GB: 4 h 5 m
64 GB: 8 h 15 m
60p 28M(PS)
50p 28M(PS)
8 GB: 35 m
16 GB: 1 h 15 m
32 GB: 2 h 30 m
64 GB: 5 h 5 m
24p 24M(FX)
25p 24M(FX)
8 GB: 40 m
16 GB: 1 h 25 m
32 GB: 3 h
64 GB: 6 h
24p 17M(FH)
25p 17M(FH)
8 GB: 55 m
16 GB: 2 h
32 GB: 4 h 5 m
64 GB: 8 h 15 m
[File Format]: [MP4]
1920x1080 60p 28M
1920x1080 50p 28M
8 GB: 35 m
16 GB: 1 h 15 m
32 GB: 2 h 35 m
64 GB: 5 h 20 m
1920x1080 30p 16M
1920x1080 25p 16M
8 GB: 1 h
16 GB: 2 h
32 GB: 4 h 10 m
64 GB: 8 h 25 m
1280x720 30p 6M
1280x720 25p 6M
8 GB: 2 h 35 m
16 GB: 5 h 20 m
32 GB: 10 h 55 m
64 GB: 22 h
*Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.
When using the camera's default settings, continuous shooting is possible for approximately
29 minutes (max.) for each shooting at a temperature of approximately 25°C (77°F).
(a product specification limit)
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
If the file format is set to MP4 (28M), continuous shooting is possible for approximately 20
minutes for each shooting (limited by file size of 4 GB).
Note
The recordable time of movies varies because the product is equipped with VBR (Variable
Bit-Rate), which automatically adjusts image quality depending on the shooting scene.
When you record a fast-moving subject, the image is clearer but the recordable time is
shorter because more memory is required for recording.
The recordable time also varies depending on the shooting conditions, the subject or the
image quality/size settings.
Notes on continuous movie recording
It requires a lot of power to perform high quality movie recording or continuous shooting
using the image sensor. Therefore, if you continue to shoot, the temperature inside the
camera will rise, especially that of the image sensor. In such cases, the camera turns off
automatically since higher temperatures affect the quality of the images or affect the
internal mechanism of the camera.
The duration of time available for movie recording is as follows when the camera starts
recording with the camera’s default settings after the power of the camera has been
turned off for a while. (The following values indicate the continuous time from when the
camera starts recording until the camera stops recording.)
Ambient temperature: 20°C (68°F)
Continuous recording time for movies: About 29 minutes
Ambient temperature: 30°C (86°F)
Continuous recording time for movies: About 29 minutes
Ambient temperature: 40°C (104°F)
Continuous recording time for movies: About 29 minutes
The duration of time available for movie recording varies with the temperature, the
recording format/setting, or condition of the camera before you start recording. If you
frequently recompose or shoot images after the power is turned on, the temperature
inside the camera will rise and the recording time available will be shorter.
When is indicated, stop recording the movie.
If the camera stops recording due to the temperature, leave it for several minutes with the
power turned off. Start recording after the temperature inside the camera drops fully.
[266] How to Use Precautions/This product Using this product abroad
Plug adaptor
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
You can use the AC Adaptor (supplied) in any country or region where the power supply is
within 100 V to 240 V AC and 50 Hz/60 Hz.
Note
Do not use an electronic voltage transformer as doing so may cause a malfunction.
[267] How to Use Precautions/This product Using this product abroad
On TV color systems
To view movies shot using this product on a television, the product and television must use
the same color television system. Check the TV color system for the country or region where
you are using the product.
NTSC system:
Bahama Islands, Bolivia, Canada, Central America, Chile, Colombia, Ecuador, Jamaica,
Japan, Korea, Mexico, Peru, Surinam, Taiwan, the Philippines, the U.S.A., Venezuela,
etc.
PAL system:
Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, Croatia, Czech Republic, Denmark, Finland, Germany,
Holland, Hong Kong, Hungary, Indonesia, Italy, Kuwait, Malaysia, New Zealand, Norway,
Poland, Portugal, Rumania, Singapore, Slovak Republic, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland,
Thailand, Turkey, United Kingdom, Viet Nam, etc.
PAL-M system:
Brazil
PAL-N system:
Argentina, Paraguay, Uruguay
SECAM system:
Bulgaria, France, Greece, Guiana, Iran, Iraq, Monaco, Russia, Ukraine, etc.
[268] How to Use Precautions/This product Other information
ZEISS lens
The camera is equipped with a ZEISS lens which is capable of reproducing sharp images
with excellent contrast. The lens for the camera has been produced under a quality
assurance system certified by ZEISS in accordance with the quality standards of ZEISS in
Germany.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
[269] How to Use Precautions/This product Other information
AVCHD format
The AVCHD format was developed for high-definition digital video cameras when recording
an HD (High-Definition) signal using high-efficiency compression coding technology. The
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 format is used to compress video data, and the Dolby Digital or Linear
PCM system is used to compress audio data.
The MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 format is capable of compressing images at higher efficiency than
that of the conventional image compressing format.
As the AVCHD format uses compression coding technology, the picture may be unstable
in scenes where the screen, angle of view, or brightness, etc. change drastically, but this
is not a malfunction.
[270] How to Use Precautions/This product Other information
License
Notes on the License
This product comes with software that are used based on licensing agreements with the
owners of that software. Based on requests by the owners of copyright of these software
applications, we have an obligation to inform you of the following. Please read the following
sections. Licenses (in English) are recorded in the internal memory of your product.
Establish a Mass Storage connection between the product and a computer to read licenses
in the “PMHOME” - “LICENSE” folder.
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR
THE PERSONAL USE OF A CONSUMER OR OTHER USES IN WHICH IT DOES NOT
RECEIVE REMUNERATION TO
(i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”)
AND/OR
(ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A
PERSONAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED
TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO.
NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE
HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
On GNU GPL/LGPL applied software
The software that is eligible for the following GNU General Public License (hereinafter
referred to as “GPL”) or GNU Lesser General Public License (hereinafter referred to as
“LGPL”) are included in the product.
This informs you that you have a right to have access to, modify, and redistribute source
code for these software programs under the conditions of the supplied GPL/LGPL.
Source code is provided on the web. Use the following URL to download it.
http://oss.sony.net/Products/Linux/
We would prefer you do not contact us about the contents of source code.
[271] How to Use Precautions/This product Trademarks
Trademarks
The following marks are registered trademarks or trademarks of Sony Corporation.
, Cyber-shot, , Memory Stick, ,
Memory Stick PRO, , Memory Stick Duo,
, Memory Stick PRO Duo,
, Memory Stick PRO-HG Duo,
, Memory Stick Micro, , MagicGate,
BRAVIA, PhotoTV HD, PlayMemories Online, PlayMemories Online logo, PlayMemories
Home, PlayMemories Home logo, PlayMemories Mobile, PlayMemories Mobile logo
PlayMemories Camera Apps, PlayMemories Camera Apps logo
Multi Interface Shoe, Multi Interface Shoe logo
XAVC S and are registered trademarks of Sony Corporation.
Blu-ray Disc™ and Blu-ray™ are trademarks of the Blu-ray Disc Association.
AVCHD Progressive and AVCHD Progressive logotype are trademarks of Panasonic
Corporation and Sony Corporation.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
Microsoft, Windows and DirectX are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Mac is a trademark of Apple Inc.
iPhone and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
Android and Google Play are trademarks or registered trademarks of Google Inc.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Wi-Fi, the Wi-Fi logo, Wi-Fi Protected Setup are registered trademarks or trademarks of
the Wi-Fi Alliance.
The N Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of NFC Forum, Inc. in the United
States and in other countries.
DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks of Digital Living Network Alliance.
Eye-Fi is a trademark of Eye-Fi Inc.
In addition, system and product names used in this manual are, in general, trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective developers or manufacturers. However, the ™
or ® marks may not be specified in all cases in this manual.
[272] Troubleshooting If you have problems If you have problems
Troubleshooting
If you experience trouble with the product, try the following solutions.
1. Check the items under “Troubleshooting”, then check the product.
If a message such as “C/E:□□:□□” appears on the screen, refer to the self-diagnosis
display.
2. Remove the battery pack, wait for about one minute, re-insert the battery pack, then
turn on the power.
3. Initialize the settings.
4. Consult your dealer or local authorized service facility. Additional information on this
product and answers to frequently asked questions can be found at our Customer
Support Website.
http://www.sony.net/
[273] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Battery pack and power
You cannot insert the battery pack into the product.
Make sure the direction of the battery pack is correct, and insert it until the battery lock
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
lever is locked.
Make sure that the battery is NP-FW50.
[274] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Battery pack and power
You cannot turn on the product.
After inserting the battery pack into the product, it may take a few moments for the product
to power up.
Make sure that the battery pack is inserted correctly.
The battery pack will discharge by itself even if you do not use it. Charge the battery pack
before use.
Make sure that the battery is NP-FW50.
[275] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Battery pack and power
The power turns off suddenly.
Depending on the product and battery pack temperature, the product may turn off
automatically to protect itself. In this case, a message is displayed on the product screen
before the product turns off.
[276] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Battery pack and power
The remaining battery level indicator shows an incorrect
level.
This phenomenon occurs when you use the product in an extremely hot or cold location.
There may be a difference between the remaining battery level indicator and the actual
remaining battery charge. Deplete the battery pack once, then charge it so that the
remaining battery level indicator is reset. The correct remaining battery level indicator may
not be displayed under some operating or environmental conditions.
Battery capacity decreases over time and through repeated use. If decreased usage time
between charges becomes significant, it is probably time to replace it with a new one.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
[277] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Battery pack and power
The charge lamp on the product flashes when charging
the battery pack.
Make sure that the battery is NP-FW50.
Remove the battery pack and then reinsert it into the product.
Batteries which have not been used for more than a year may have deteriorated.
Charging has paused temporarily because the camera is not within the appropriate
temperature range.
This phenomenon occurs when you charge the battery pack in an extremely hot or cold
location. The optimum temperature for charging the battery pack is between 10 °C and 30
°C (50 °F and 86 °F).
[278] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Battery pack and power
The battery pack is not charged.
When the battery pack is not charged (the charge lamp does not light) even if you follow
the proper charging procedure, check if the power of the product is turned off, then
remove the battery pack and re-insert the same battery pack securely, or disconnect and
reconnect the USB cable.
[279] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Battery pack and power
The monitor does not turn on even when the product is
turned on.
[FINDER/MONITOR] has been set to [Viewfinder(Manual)]. Change [FINDER/MONITOR]
to [Auto].
[280] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Shooting still images/movies
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
You cannot record images.
You are using a memory card with a write-protect switch, and the switch is set to the
LOCK position. Set the switch to the record position.
Check the free capacity of the memory card.
You cannot record images while charging the flash.
The [Self-timer] is activated.
Set [Release w/o Card] to [Enable]. However, without a memory card inserted in the
camera, images cannot be recorded.
[281] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Shooting still images/movies
There is a clacking sound when the brightness of the
subject changes.
The functioning of the ND filter inside the lens produces audio and image disturbances.
This is not a malfunction.
[282] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Shooting still images/movies
Recording takes a long time.
The noise reduction function is processing an image. This is not a malfunction.
You are shooting in RAW mode. Since RAW data files are large, RAW mode shooting
may take time.
The [Auto HDR] function is processing an image.
The product is compiling images.
[283] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Shooting still images/movies
The same image is captured multiple times.
Set the drive mode to [Single Shooting].
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
[284] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Shooting still images/movies
The shutter is released continuously.
The camera may automatically take multiple shots and perform overlay processing under
the following conditions:
[ISO] is set to [Multi Frame NR].
The shooting mode is set to [Sweep Panorama].
The shooting mode is set to [Superior Auto].
The shooting mode is set to [Hand- held Twilight] or [Anti Motion Blur] under [Scene Selection].
[DRO/Auto HDR] is set to [Auto HDR].
[285] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Shooting still images/movies
The image is out of focus.
The subject is too close. Shoot from the shortest shooting distance (W side: Approx. 3 cm
(0.10 ft), T side: Approx. 25 cm (0.82 ft) (from the lens)).
Press the shutter button halfway down, then shoot images.
Ambient light is insufficient.
[Focus Mode] has been set to [Manual Focus]. Set [Focus Mode] to a setting other than
[Manual Focus].
[286] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Shooting still images/movies
Zoom does not work.
You cannot use zoom functions during Sweep Panorama shooting.
You can use only the optical zoom in the following situations:
When using Smile Shutter function.
[Quality] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG].
[287] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Shooting still images/movies
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
The flash does not work.
Raise the flash.
You cannot use a flash in the following situations:
When the following modes are selected in [Scene Selection].
[Anti Motion Blur]
[Night Scene]
[Hand-held Twilight]
During Sweep Panorama shooting.
During movie recording.
[288] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Shooting still images/movies
Fuzzy white circular spots appear on images shot using
the flash.
Particles (dust, pollen, etc.) in the air reflected the flash light and appeared on the image.
This is not a malfunction.
[289] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Shooting still images/movies
The close-up shoot function (Macro) does not work.
The product automatically adjusts the focus. Press and hold the shutter button halfway
down. Focus adjustment may take some time when shooting a close subject.
The close-up shoot function will not work when the following modes are selected in
[Scene Selection]:
[Sports Action]
[290] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Shooting still images/movies
The recording date and time are not displayed on the
screen.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
While shooting, the date and time are not displayed. They are displayed only during
playback.
[291] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Shooting still images/movies
The date and time are recorded incorrectly.
Set the correct date and time.
The area selected using [Area Setting] differs from the actual area. Select the actual area.
[292] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Shooting still images/movies
The aperture value and/or shutter speed flashes.
The subject is too bright or too dark to shoot using the current aperture value and/or
shutter speed settings. Readjust the settings.
[293] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Shooting still images/movies
The image colors are not correct.
Adjust [White Balance].
[Picture Effect] is set. Set [Picture Effect] to [Off].
[Picture Profile] is set. Set [Picture Profile] to [Off].
To reset settings to default, perform [Setting Reset].
[294] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Shooting still images/movies
Noise appears in the image when you view the screen in
a dark place.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
The product is attempting to increase the visibility of the screen by temporarily brightening
the monitor under conditions of low illumination. There is no effect on the recorded image.
[295] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Shooting still images/movies
Dark shadow appears on the image.
Depending on the brightness of the subject, you may see a dark shadow when you
change the aperture. This is not a malfunction.
[296] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Shooting still images/movies
The eyes of the subject come out red.
Set [Red Eye Reduction] to [On].
Shoot the subject at a distance closer than the flash range using the flash.
Light the room and shoot the subject.
[297] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Shooting still images/movies
Dots appear and remain on the screen.
This is not a malfunction. These dots are not recorded.
[298] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Shooting still images/movies
You cannot shoot images continuously.
The memory card is full. Delete unnecessary images.
The battery level is low. Insert a charged battery pack.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
[299] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Shooting still images/movies
The image is not clear in the viewfinder.
Adjust the diopter scale properly using the diopter-adjustment dial.
[300] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Shooting still images/movies
No images appear on the viewfinder.
[FINDER/MONITOR] has been set to [Monitor(Manual)]. Change [FINDER/MONITOR] to
[Auto] or [Viewfinder(Manual)].
Bring your eye close to the viewfinder.
[301] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Shooting still images/movies
No images appear on the monitor.
If you shoot images at waist height when [FINDER/MONITOR] has been set to [Auto], the
monitor will turn off due to the reaction of the eye sensor. Set [FINDER/MONITOR] to
[Monitor(Manual)].
[302] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Shooting still images/movies
[Finder/Monitor Sel.] does not work even though it has
been assigned to a certain key using [Custom Key
Settings].
[FINDER/MONITOR] is currently set to [Auto]. Set [FINDER/MONITOR] to
[Viewfinder(Manual)] or [Monitor(Manual)].
[303] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Shooting still images/movies
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
The image is whitish (Flare)./Blurring of light appears on
the image (Ghosting).
When pointing the lens toward the strong light source, excessive light enters the lens and
the image may come out white (flare) or extraneous light (ghost images) may appear on
the image, but this is not a malfunction.
Set up the composition so that you shoot images while avoiding backlit condition.
[304] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Shooting still images/movies
The image is blurred.
Make sure that [SteadyShot] is set to [On].
The picture was taken in a dark location without the flash, resulting in camera-shake. The
use of a tripod or the flash is recommended. [Hand-held Twilight] and [Anti Motion Blur] in
[Scene Selection] are also effective in reducing blur.
[305] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Shooting still images/movies
The monitor darkens after a short period of time passed.
If you do not operate the product for a certain period of time, the product switches to the
power-save mode. The product exits power-save mode when you perform operations
such as pressing the shutter button halfway.
[306] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Shooting still images/movies
The flash takes too long to recharge.
The flash has been fired in succession in a short period. When the flash has been fired in
succession, the recharging process may take longer than usual to avoid overheating of
the camera.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
[307] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Shooting still images/movies
The control dial or control wheel does not work.
[Dial / Wheel Lock] is on. Hold down the Fn button until the lock is released, or set the
[Dial / Wheel Lock] to [Unlock].
[308] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Shooting still images/movies
Sound is not recorded properly.
If you turn down the [Audio Rec Level] to the lowest sound level, audio will not be
recorded.
If you turn up the [Audio Rec Level] to the highest sound level, there will likely be sound
clipping.
[309] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Viewing images
Images cannot be played back.
Make sure that the memory card is fully inserted into the product.
The folder/file name has been changed on your computer.
When an image file has been processed by a computer or when the image file was
recorded using a model other than this product, playback on this product is not
guaranteed.
The product is in USB mode. Disconnect the product from the computer.
Use PlayMemories Home to play back on this product images that are stored on your
computer.
[310] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Viewing images
The date and time are not displayed.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
The screen display is set to display images only. Press DISP (Display Setting) on the
control wheel to display the information.
[311] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Viewing images
The image cannot be deleted.
Cancel the protection.
[312] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Viewing images
The image was deleted by mistake.
Once you have deleted an image, you cannot restore it. We recommend that you protect
images that you do not want to delete.
[313] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Viewing images
A DPOF mark cannot be put.
You cannot place DPOF marks on RAW images.
[314] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Wi-Fi
You cannot find the wireless access point to be
connected.
Wireless access points may not be displayed on the product due to signal conditions.
Place the product closer to the wireless access point.
Wireless access points may not be displayed on the product depending on the access
point settings. Refer to the instruction manual of the wireless access point.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
[315] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Wi-Fi
[WPS Push] does not work.
[WPS Push] may not work depending on the access point settings. Check the SSID and
password of the wireless access point, and perform [Access Point Set.].
[316] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Wi-Fi
[Send to Computer] is canceled halfway.
When the battery remaining level is low, [Send to Computer] may be canceled halfway.
Charge the battery pack and try again.
[317] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Wi-Fi
You cannot send movies to a smartphone.
You cannot send XAVC S movies to a smartphone.
You cannot send AVCHD movies to a smartphone. Set [File Format] to [MP4] before
recording movies.
[318] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Wi-Fi
[Smart Remote Embedded] or [Send to Smartphone] is
canceled halfway.
When the remaining battery level is low, [Smart Remote Embedded] or [Send to
Smartphone] may be canceled halfway. Charge the battery pack and try again.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
[319] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Wi-Fi
The shooting screen for [Smart Remote Embedded] is
not displayed smoothly./The connection between this
product and the smartphone is disconnected.
Data communication between this product and the smartphone may fail due to signal
conditions. Place this product closer to the smartphone.
[320] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Wi-Fi
You cannot use One-Touch connection (NFC).
Place the (N mark) on the smartphone and the (N mark) on the product as close
together as possible. If there is no response, move the smartphone a few millimeters or
move the smartphone away from this product, wait more than 10 seconds, and then touch
them together again.
[Airplane Mode] is set to [On]. Set [Airplane Mode] to [Off].
Check whether the NFC function is activated on your smartphone. For details, refer to the
instruction manual of the smartphone.
Do not place any metal objects other than a smartphone near the (N mark).
Do not contact two or more smartphones to this product at the same time.
If another NFC-based application is running on your smartphone, terminate that
application.
Switch to shooting mode before touching the smartphone to the product. The application
will not activate if the product is in playback mode.
[321] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Computers
The computer does not recognize this product.
Set [USB Connection] to [Mass Storage].
Check that the power of the camera is turned on.
If the battery level is low, insert a charged battery pack.
Use the micro USB cable (supplied) to connect the devices.
Disconnect the USB cable, and connect it again firmly.
Disconnect all equipment other than this product, the keyboard and the mouse from the
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
USB terminals of your computer.
Connect this product directly to your computer without passing through a USB hub or
other device.
If you set [USB Power Supply] to [Off], the computer may be able to recognize this
product.
[322] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Computers
You cannot import images.
Connect this product and your computer correctly making a USB connection.
When you shoot images with a memory card formatted by a computer, you may not be
able to import the images to a computer. Shoot using a memory card formatted by this
product.
[323] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Computers
The image and sound are interrupted by noise when
viewing a movie on a computer.
You are playing back the movie directly from the memory card. Import the movie to your
computer using PlayMemories Home and play it back.
[324] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Computers
Images exported from a computer cannot be viewed on
this product.
Use PlayMemories Home to copy images that are stored on a computer onto a memory
card inserted into this product and view them on this product.
[325] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Memory cards
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Formatted the memory card by mistake.
All the data on the memory card is deleted by formatting. You cannot restore the data.
[326] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Printing
You cannot print images.
RAW images cannot be printed. To print RAW images, first convert them to JPEG images
using Image Data Converter.
[327] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Printing
The color of the image is strange.
When you print the images recorded in Adobe RGB mode using sRGB printers that are
not compatible with Adobe RGB (DCF2.0/Exif2.21), the images are printed at a lower
saturation.
[328] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Printing
Images are printed with both edges cut off.
Depending on your printer, the left, right, top, and bottom edges of the image may be cut
off. Especially when you print an image shot with [Aspect Ratio] set to [16:9], the
lateral end of the image may be cut off.
When printing images using your printer, cancel the trimming or borderless settings of the
printer. Consult the printer manufacturer as to whether the printer provides these
functions or not.
When you print images at a shop, ask the shop whether they can print the images without
cutting off both edges.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
[329] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Printing
You cannot print images with the date.
If you set [Write Date] to [On], you can print still images with the date. Note that you
cannot delete the date from the image on the camera.
If you want to print images with the date, use [Print Setting] under [Specify Printing].
You can print images with the date superimposed if the printer or the software can
recognize Exif information. For compatibility with Exif information, consult the
manufacturer of the printer or the software.
Using PlayMemories Home (Windows version only), you can insert a date even into
images that were taken without recording the date.
When you print images at a shop, images can be printed with the date if you ask them to
do so.
[330] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Others
The lens gets fogged.
Moisture condensation has occurred. Turn off the product and leave it for about an hour
before using it.
[331] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Others
The product stops with the lens portion extended./The
product turns off with the lens portion extended.
Do not attempt to force lens that has stopped moving.
Insert a charged battery pack, then turn the product on again.
[332] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Others
The product becomes warm when you use it for a long
time.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
This is not a malfunction. Turn off the product and do not use it for a while.
[333] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Others
The Clock Set screen appears when you turn on the
product.
Set the date and time again.
The internal rechargeable backup battery has discharged. Insert a charged battery, and
set aside for 24 hours or more with the power left off.
[334] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Others
The number of recordable images does not decrease, or
decreases two images at a time.
This is because the compression rate and the image size after compression change
depending on the image when you shoot a JPEG image.
[335] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Others
Settings are reset even though resetting operation has
not been performed.
The camera settings may be reset if the battery pack is ejected while the power is on.
When ejecting the battery pack, first turn the power off and check that the access lamp is
not illuminated before ejecting.
[336] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Others
The product does not work properly.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Turn off the product. Remove the battery pack and insert it again. If the product is hot,
remove the battery pack, and allow it to cool down before trying this corrective procedure.
If an AC-PW20 AC Adaptor (sold separately) is used, disconnect the power cord.
Connect the power cord and turn on the product again. If the product repeats the same
error often or still does not work after trying these solutions, consult your Sony dealer or
local authorized Sony service facility.
[337] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Others
A sound is produced when the product is shaken.
Sound may be produced when the product is shaken while the power is turned off, but
this is not a malfunction.
[338] Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Others
“--E-” appears on the screen.
Remove the memory card, and insert it again. If the problem persists even after
performing this procedure, format the memory card.
[339] Troubleshooting Messages Messages
Self-diagnosis display
If a code starting with a letter of the alphabet appears, the self-diagnosis function on this
product is working. The last two digits (indicated by □□) will differ depending on the state of
this product.
If you cannot solve the problem even after trying the following corrective actions a few times,
this product may need repair. Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service
facility.
C:32:□□
There is trouble with the product’s hardware. Turn the power off and on again.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
C:13:□□
This product cannot read or write data on the memory card. Try turning off and on this
product again, or taking out and inserting the memory card several times.
An unformatted memory card is inserted. Format the memory card.
The inserted memory card cannot be used with this product, or the data is damaged.
Insert a new memory card.
E:61:□□
E:62:□□
E:91:□□
A product malfunction has occurred. Initialize this product, then turn the power on again.
E:94:□□
There is a malfunction when writing or deleting data. Repair is required. Contact your
Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility. Be prepared to give all numbers in
the error code beginning from the E.
[340] Troubleshooting Messages Messages
Warning messages
Set Area/Date/Time.
Set the area, date and time. If you have not used the product for a long time, charge the
internal rechargeable backup battery.
Unable to use memory card. Format?
The memory card was formatted on a computer and the file format was modified. Select
[Enter], and then format the memory card. You can use the memory card again, however,
all previous data in the memory card is erased. It may take some time to complete the
format. If the message still appears, change the memory card.
Memory Card Error
An incompatible memory card is inserted.
Formatting has failed. Format the memory card again.
Unable to read memory card. Reinsert memory card.
An incompatible memory card is inserted.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
The memory card is damaged.
The terminal section of the memory card is dirty.
Memory card locked.
You are using a memory card with a write-protect switch or a delete-protect switch with
the switch set to the LOCK position. Set the switch to the record position.
Cannot open the shutter since the memory card is not inserted.
No memory card has been inserted.
To release the shutter without inserting a memory card into the camera, set [Release w/o
Card] to [Enable]. In this case, images will not be saved.
This memory card may not be capable of recording and playing normally.
An incompatible memory card is inserted.
Processing...
When performing noise reduction, the reduction process takes place. You cannot do any
further shooting during this reduction process.
Unable to display.
Images recorded with other products or images modified with a computer may not be
displayed.
Processing on the computer such as deletion of the image files may cause
inconsistencies in the image database files. Repair the image database files.
Unable to print.
You tried to mark RAW images with a DPOF mark.
Internal temp. high. Allow it to cool.
The product has become hot because you have been shooting continuously. Turn the
power off. Cool the product and wait until the product is ready to shoot again.
You have been recording images for a long time, the product temperature has risen. Stop
recording images until the product cools.
Recording is unavailable in this movie format.
Set [ File Format] to [MP4].
The number of images exceeds that for which date management in a database file by the
product is possible.
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
Unable to register to the database file. Import all the images to a computer and recover
the memory card.
Image DataBase File error
There is something wrong in the Image Database File. Select [Setup] → [Recover Image
DB].
System Error
Camera Error. Turn power off then on.
Remove the battery pack, and then re-insert it. If the message appears frequently, consult
your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.
Unable to magnify.
Unable to rotate image.
Images recorded with other products may not be enlarged or rotated.
Cannot create more folders.
A folder in the memory card has the first three digits “999.” You cannot create any more
folders on this camera.
[341] Troubleshooting Situations this product has difficulty handling Situations this
product has difficulty handling
Situations this product has difficulty handling
The product cannot take full advantage of some features under certain circumstances.
When shooting under the following conditions, either recompose the shot or change the
shooting mode, then shoot the images again.
Low light conditions
Sweep Panorama
Lock-on AF
High Frame Rate
Overly bright conditions
Lock-on AF
Varying levels of brightness
Lock-on AF
Help Guide
file:///Z|/15-1h_HG/Kaihan_20151021_FV-ZV/Nouhin/Web/4574925122.w/en/print.html[10/27/2015 6:18:47 PM]
High Frame Rate
Flickering lights
Sweep Panorama
High Frame Rate
Subjects too close to the product
Sweep Panorama
Subjects with large movements or subjects that move too quickly
Superior Auto
Sweep Panorama
Auto HDR
Lock-on AF
Subjects too small or too large
Sweep Panorama
Lock-on AF
Scenes with little contrast, such as the sky or a sandy beach
Sweep Panorama
Superior Auto
Scenes changing constantly, such as a waterfall
Sweep Panorama
Superior Auto